Home

Dodge 2004 Ram 1500 Automobile User Manual

Contents

1. la Mirrors eo RE RR 74 Automatic Dimming Driver s Exterior Inside Day Night Mirror 74 M EE E i Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 74 m uu M aun MPs r 78 Outside Mirrors lle 75 Operation ccaccssecccecesseesesees 80 ee os m Phone Call Featies oo eee cece cece eee 86 Electric Remote Control Mirrors 76 LR Onmeet UB SISI FERRIES 2 scite wags nwa te d Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 77 Advanced Phone Connectivity 93 Heated Mirrors If Equipped 77 TO QU Dnot d Bnew peur sore UConriect M Systems iae ats panre Pes 95 70 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Meats ee te eee boa E eal as Front Seat Manual Seat Adjustment Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment If Equipped rss e cocer perine ha ERE ege Adjustable Head Restraints All Seating Positiofis sae Sedo eee bie rae 8 Way Driver s Power Seat If Equipped 4 Way Passenger s Power Seat If Equipped 4 4 ces EE ERE E Front Heated Seats If Equipped Second Row 40 20 40 Seat Fold And Tumble 21229 EGoRac USt REX Seve Third Row Seat Bench If Equipped Third Seat 50 50 Split Seat If Equipped 111 lll Driv
2. When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SET The volume can be turned down but not up when the audio system is off and the ignition is ON 8118786d 180 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se Mode Button Radio Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the Radio CD player Hands Free Phone Satellite or Vehicle Entertainment System VES if equipped SEEK Button Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped mode Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down The radio will remained tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding the button and will bypass stations without stopping until you release it MUTE Button Radio Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers NOTE In Hands Free Phone if equipped mode the MUTE button mutes the microphone SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds
3. 326 357 359 Temperature Gauge 0 000000 164 Cruise Control Speed Control 132 Cup Holdef so seg eset RR Re RAE 154 Customer Assistance 0002 eee 385 Data Recorder Event 00 0000 cee 52 Daytime Running Lights 123 Dealer Service llle 310 Defroster Rear Window 213 Defroster Windshield 66 200 205 Delay Intermittent Wipers 126 Diagnostic System Onboard 307 Dimmer Switch Headlight 165 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission 332 Oil Engine uode REC RR HS Doel Ud ES ore 311 Power Steering ius cras ia ana Re rr gis 320 Disarming Theft System 20 25 Disc Brakes llle 330 Disposal Used Coolant 24i 325 Door Ajar Light 2 406 es RR RR 169 Door LOCKS 4 2 yk n eae OER 3 ERE 13 Door Opener Garage 0 000000 cae 142 Drive Belts 2 0 00 ccc ee eee 315 Drive Shaft Universal Joints 321 Electric Remote Mirrors 000000 76 Electrical Power Outlets lilius 151 Electronic Speed Control ss ossis issia disia a si 132 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 239 Jacking eter tia cuerno ees Overheating Tow Hooks 398 INDEX MM TOWING M CE 299 Emission Control System Maintenance 362 Emission Related Components 329 E
4. 140 Wind Buffeting 2 2 evo ea xS 150 Manual Compass Calibration 140 Sunroof Maintenance lille 151 en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73 Bi Electrical Power Outlets 0 151 Floor Console Features 2 5 153 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off H Factory Installed Roof Luggage Rack If Battery Fed Configuration 152 Equipped serrar tadan amine Siang ante as a areas 155 W Floor Console si ix dea ee dered ER oe es 158 W Cargo Management System If Equipped 156 E 74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward rear of truck The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward windshield Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror will automatically adjust for annoying head light glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light in the button will indicate when the dimming feature is activated This option also controls the driver s side mirror when it is equipped with auto dimming
5. less 75 OVerdEBye 34m 2 S84 hae Roane ae oa 167 223 Overdrive OFF Switch 0 0000 223 Overhead Console sss 135 136 Overhead Travel Information Center 136 Overheating Engine 204 166 327 Owner s Manual cee eee 390 Panic Alatt zur eda reb uH Ra re EX ES 21 Parking Brake 0 0 2 eee eee 234 Parking On Hill 52s IRR dans 234 Passing Light 2 2 erbe ees 125 Pedals Adjustable 52 aee ee ERR 130 Pets senerara pata TT 64 Pets Transporting ecc presses e bue ea pets 64 Phone Cellular eere 78 Phone Hands Free 0 0 0 ee eee nee 78 Placard Tire and Loading Information 245 Positive Crankcase Valve ls 330 Power Brakes oee Aa dose aeu oe tea ee PS 330 Distribution Center 000008 341 345 Door Locks ois ace ve Pie eared ea Ree es 13 14 MiIIOI Aa5 bea fede hae CX EG RR ee ea 76 Outlet i22 ea ba Ga hs GOR Oe phata ps ea d 151 Steering ex o e RE RA 238 320 SUDFOOE iier uu P RAUS VE RONEA AD Ea A 149 MWiandOWS x uoa b Eee ena dob rH 27 Power Steering Fluid 004 360 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 37 Preparation for Jacking 00 291 Pretensioners Seat Belts ues oA enr eger dra 35 Programmable Electronic Features 144 148 Programming Transmitters 22 144 148 Radial Ply Tires o ii ak nace heated We 252 Radiator Cap Coolant P
6. Miles 33 000 36 000 39 000 42 000 45 000 Kilometers 53 000 58 000 62 000 67 000 72 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter or at 3 X X X X X months whichever comes first Rotate tires X X Change rear axle fluid X Change front axle fluid 4X4 X Inspect brake linings X Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace if neces X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 370 SCHEDULE B ME quired Miles 48 000 51 000 54 000 57 000 60 000 Kilometers 77 000 82 000 86 000 91 000 96 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter or at 3 X X X X X months whichever comes first Rotate tires X X X Change rear axle fluid X Change front axle fluid 4X4 X Inspect brake linings X Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace if neces X sary Replace spark plugs X Inspect PCV valve replace as necessary X Inspect and replace ignition cables if necessary 5 7L only i Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if re X en SCHEDULE B 371 change main sump filter 4 7L 5 7L only This ap plies only if your vehicle is used for police taxi Inspect transfer case fluid 4X4 Miles 48 000 51 000 54 000 57 000 60 000 Kilometers 77 000 82 000 86 000 91 000 96 000 Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid X chang
7. Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and that they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle have combination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is de signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se freely with you under normal conditions But in a colli WARNING sion the belt will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of WARNING your body These are the strongest parts of your It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area body and can take the forces of a collision the inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much
8. New Entry Added 8131b294 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Setup Confirmation Pairin Prompts Fairing Confirmation Prompts on off Say 4 digit System Lists pin code Phones Say Priority number of List Phones phone to delete Start Pairing procedure on phone See phone s owner manual System System Lists Phone Deleted Enter Nameofphone Mamea Enter Nameofphone prere pas Assign Priority of phone 1 to 7 1 having highest priority All Phones Deleted Pairing Complete Select Phone Language Say Priority Select a language number of English Espanol phone to or Francais select New phone will temporarily override phone priorities Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 815a5401 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Primary Zero Add location All Confirmation prompts Delete a name Language List names North American English Alternate s Oh Add new All of them Confirmations prompts Delete Select language List all List paired phones Pager Phone pairing Phonebook Return to main menu Select phone Set up List phones Beeper Pairing Phone book Return Main menu select Phone settings phone set up 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M SEATS Front Seat Manual Seat Adjustment The adjusting lever
9. Floor Heat 3 Outside air flows primarily through the floor out lets located under the instrument panel A small amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets Mix We Outside air flows in equal proportions through the floor and defroster outlets Bi Level er Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel and those located on the floor NOTE There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Defrost Sq Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield through the defroster outlets located at the base of the windshield and side window demist outlets NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if 206 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se the A C snowflake button has not been pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield Rear Temperature Control ATC The REAR FUNCTIONS button cycles through the following modes Rear Control from Front This allows the driver or passenger to control the rear blower speeds using the FAN rocker switch and the rear temperature using the TEMP rocker switch While in this mode pressing the POWER button will turn the rear system off Pressing the POWER TEMP or FAN buttons will turn the rear system
10. SERVICE DESCRIPTION MAXIMUM LOAD MAXIMUM SIZE PRESSURE DESIGNATION TREADWEAR U S DOT TRACTION SAFETY a AND STANDARDS x TEMPERATURE CODE GRADES TIN 811b44e8 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample P215 65R15 95H 240 STARTING AND OPERATING ME European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LI Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 e Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High Flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT ee STARTING AND OPERATING 241 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U
11. ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317 Catalytic Converter The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emission control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you 318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex haust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact any thing that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst
12. Do not sit in the third row seat unless the cushion and back are properly engaged Proper engagement can be verified by pushing pulling on the upright seatback The seatback will not move unless prop erly engaged Do not sit in the 3rd row seat with the second row seatback s folded or tumbled In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured To Fold The Seat s Pull up the release handle s and move the seatback forward This can be performed from either the front or rear of the third row seats The seatback and seat cushion move simultaneously into load floor position and rests 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M on the floor behind the second row seats The seat belt buckles are hinged and fold with the seatbacks To Achieve Maximum Cargo Capacity Pull the release handles and strap on the second row seats and fold flat After folding the third row seats unsnap the flipper panels on the back of the third row seatbacks and flip the panels onto the backs of the second row seats NOTE Before returning the second row 40 seats the upright position always reposition the flipper panel s and snap onto the third row seat first NOTE The seat belt buckles are hinged to fold with the seat backs To Return The Seat s To An Upright Position If required unsnap the strap s Pull on the seatback from the rear of the vehicle to reposition the
13. If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical WARNING system remains functional vehicles equipped with Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you power door locks will unlock automatically In addition need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has stopped Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of e E badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side moving the interior lights will light until the ignition of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body switch is turned off structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system The Airb ag Light airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications N are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag You will want to have the airbags ready to system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to e 3 H be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat inflate for your protection man impact While attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufac the airbag system is designed to be mainte turer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify an a l advanc
14. NOTE The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the key is not ON the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans mission is shifted into Park P with the transfer case in Neutral N and the engine RUNNING With the transfer case in Neutral N ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into Park P Shifting OUT of Neutral N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring vehicle to a complete stop 2 Shut engine OFF ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 3 Turn the ignition key to the ON position without starting the engine 4 Depress brake pedal 5 Shift automatic transmission to Neutral N 6 Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object depress the recessed transfer case Neutral N button for 1 second 7 After the Neutral N indicator light turns off release the Neutral N button 8 After the Neutral N button has been released the transfer case will shift to the position identified by the selector switch 9 Shift automatic transmission into Park P 10 Start the engine 11 Shift automatic transmission into Drive D NOTE Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to depressing the Neutral N selection button and must continue to be met until 1 s
15. SAFE range at or below the ADD mark on the engine oil level indicator dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the ADD mark will result in a reading at the top of the SAFE range ADD OIL MARK LZ FULL RANGE MARK 4X am G 80c0715e 312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could dam age your engine Frequency Of Oil Change Road conditions and your style of driving affect the interval at which your oil should be changed Check the following to determine if ANY apply to you e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and Go driving e Extensive engine idling e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 2 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Trailer towing Taxi Police or delivery service com mercial service e Off Road or desert operation e If equipped for and operating with E 85 ethanol fuel NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual If none of these apply to you then change your engine oil at every interval shown on schedule A of the Mainte nance Schedules section of this manual 4x4 Mod
16. The SVC 4WD warning light monitors the electric shift 4WD system If this light remains on after engine start up a STARTING AND OPERATING 227 or illuminates during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required WARNING Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the Service 4WD light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning The NV 144 transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take place Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below AWD Normal All Wheel Drive High Range Employs inter axle differential Allows front and rear wheels to rotate at different speeds All road surfaces 228 STA
17. fuel capacity which corresponds to approximately 5 of tank volume This reserve capacity was put in place to prevent the likelihood of customers running out of fuel when operating at maximum load conditions in areas where there aren t many gas stations NOTE The Distance To Empty will remain equal to zero until the vehicle runs out of fuel or is refueled Trip Odometer ODO This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Elapsed Time ET This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time since the last reset C T Button 811a72d7 Use this button to select a readout of the outside tem perature and one of eight compass headings that indicate the direction in which the vehicle is facing 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Compass Temperature Display WARNING Even if the display still reads a few degrees above 32 F 0 C the road surface may be icy particularly in woods or on bridges Drive carefully under such conditions to prevent an accident and possible per sonal injury or property damage Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually set the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the CAL symbol will be displayed After completing one 360 turn with the vehicle traveling less than 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from large metal or metallic objects the CAL symbol will turn o
18. that the transmission fluid be maintained at the pre scribed level using the recommended fluid CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Recommended Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives to the transmission Exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335 fluid leaks The use of transmission sealers should be avoided since they may adversely affect seals Transfer Case Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks If a fluid leak is evident the transfer case fluid level may be low Have the transfer case serviced immediately CAUTION Damage may result from operation of the vehicle with low transfer case fluid The transfer case fluid should be drained and refilled at the intervals specified Lubricant Selection Refer to Recommended Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Axles Refer to Recommended Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type The manufacturer does not recommend regularly sched uled oil changes for axles in vehicles wh
19. 2 Using the wheel wrench loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 When changing a front wheel place the jack under the frame rail behind the wheel Locate the jack as far forward as possible on the straight part of the frame prior to inboard transition Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel wrench the tube exten sion may be used but is not required Front Jacking Location When changing a rear wheel assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube Place the jack under the axle as close to ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 293 the tire as posssible with the drive tubes extending to the rear Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench Rear Right Jacking Location protoded Before raising the wheel off the ground make sure that Rear Left Jacking Location the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required 4 By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise raise the vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface 294 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle unstable and cause an accident It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop c
20. 378 SCHEDULE A NENNEN required Miles 36 000 42 000 48 000 54000 60 000 66 000 Kilometers 58 000 67 000 77 000 84 000 96 000 106 000 Months 36 42 48 54 60 66 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Rotate tires X X X X X X Check transfer case fluid level 4X4 X Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months if not replaced at 102 000 miles 163 X 000 km Inspect brake linings X X Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace if X necessary Replace spark plugs X Inspect PCV valve replace as necessary X Inspect and replace ignition cables if neces X sary 5 7L only Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if X a SCHEDULE A 379 Miles 72 000 78 000 84 000 90 000 96 000 100 000 Kilometers 115 000 125 000 134 000 144 000 154 000 160 000 Months 72 78 84 90 96 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X Rotate tires X X X X X X Check transfer case fluid level 4X4 X Inspect brake linings X X Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace if X necessary Replace spark plugs X Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required x lt Inspect PCV valve replace as necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D
21. ME Miles 105 000 108 000 111 000 114 000 117 000 120 000 Kilometers 168 000 173 000 178 000 182 000 187 000 192 000 Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid X change filter 3 7L This applies only if your vehicle is used for police taxi fleet or fre quent trailer towing Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid X and change main sump filter and spin on cooler return filter if equipped 4 7L 5 7L only This applies only if your vehicle is used for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer tow ing Flush and replace engine coolant at 120 X months if not replaced at 102 000 miles 163 000 km Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all re ceipts M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 en SCHEDULE A 377 Schedule A Miles 6 000 12 000 18 000 24 000 30 000 Kilometers 10 000 19 000 29 000 38 000 48 000 Months 6 12 18 24 30 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X Rotate tires X X X X X Check transfer case fluid level 4X4 X Inspect brake linings X Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace as neces sary Replace spark plugs M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8
22. 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 189 Operation Instructions CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play SEEK Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next MP3 File Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays the beginning of the MP3 file Pressing the button within the first ten seconds plays the previous file LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode For MP3 Play LOAD EJECT Load Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push butto
23. CONTENTS i Emission Control System Maintenance 362 Schedule B ga sn ecse eee a ke Ry nee es H Emissions Testing iis he RO i 362 Schedule AY asc s xad sean KR ORC B Maintenance Schedules 0 363 Mi Vehicle Storage 2 25445 e or n M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 362 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled maintenance services listed in bold type on the following pages must be done at the times or mileages specified to assure the continued proper func tioning of the emission control system These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service also should be done any time a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part which has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations EMISSIONS TESTING In some localities it may be or will become a legal requirement to ensure that all emissions compo
24. Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube wait a minimum of two 2 minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level NOTE Ifitis necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two COLD lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70 F 21 C room temperature If the fluid level is correctly established at room temperature it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 82 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature 334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading 7 Check for leaks Release parking brake To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Automatic Transmission Fluid And Filter Change It is important that proper lubricant is used in the transmission Refer to Recommended Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type It is important
25. To open the hood two latches must be released First pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Then push the safety latch lever to the left It is located NOTE Ensure hood prop rod is fully seated into clip between the grille and hood opening right of the center before closing hood to prevent damage to grille WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the center front edge of the hood to ensure that both latches engage Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M LIGHTS 811aa567 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Interior Lights 811aa583 Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened when the dimmer control rotating wheel on the right side of the switch is rotated to the second upward detent position or when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the key fob When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control all the way down to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to go out This allows the doors to stay open for extended p
26. To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button Do NOT release the button 2 The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds Without releasing the HomeLink button proceed with Programming step 2 For questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Security Garage Door Opener Operation with Security Alarm if equipped If your vehicle is equipped with the Security Alarm feature the operation of the HomeLink feature will be purposely inhibited if the Security Alarm is Armed This prevents HomeLink operation due to un authorized vehicle entry HomeLink operation will be re stored when the Security Alarm has been Disarmed If you sell your vehicle be sure to erase the frequencies To erase all of the previously trained frequencies hold down both outside buttons until the 2 dots below House Symbol begin to flash about 20 seconds This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equi
27. U L E S 8 380 SCHEDULE A NENNEN Miles 102 000 108 000 114 000 120 000 Kilometers 163 000 173 000 182 000 192 000 Months 102 108 114 120 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X Rotate tires X X X X Drain and refill tranfer case fluid 4X4 X PA replace engine coolant if not replaced at 60 X Flush and replace engine coolant at 120 months if not X replaced at 102 000 miles 163 000 km Inspect brake linings X Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace as necessary X Replace spark plugs X Inspect PCV valve replace as necessary X Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all re ceipts en SCHEDULE A 381 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic VEHICLE STORAGE If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days we recommend that you take the following steps to mini mize the drain on your vehicle s battery e Disconnect the Ignition Off Draw fuse L O D fuse located in the Power Distribution Center PDC The LO D cavity includes a snap in retainer that allows the fuse to be disconnected without removing it from the fuse bl
28. Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is designed to be used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated tele phone system You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as paging service or automated customer service Some services require immediate response selection in some instances that may be too quick for use of UConnect system When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can push the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your pin number followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 f you can press the Voice Recognition button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used to navigate through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is playing Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the Voice Recognition button and say Pair a Phone to select that opt
29. engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released If this occurs continue cranking with the accel erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor the Normal Starting procedure should be repeated 220 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the Do not leave children or animals inside parked throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing cause serious injury or death serious personal injury Engine Block Heater If Equipped After Starting The engine block heater warms engine coolant and The idle speed is automatically controlled on fuel injected permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord engines and will decrease as the engine warms up to a standard 110 115 volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord CAUTION The 3 7L 4 7L engine block heater cord is located at the front of the engine compartment near the radiator cap Long periods of engine idling can cause ex
30. etc If dirty clean the radiator core by gently spraying water from a garden hose at the back of the core Check the coolant bottle tubing for condition and tight ness of connection at coolant bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the coolant pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of coolant from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing prop erly the coolant will begin to drain from the coolant bottle Do not remove the pressure cap when the cooling system is hot ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325 WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool If you open the hood and see steam or hot coolant escaping from the radiator don t touch anything Get away quickly Never try to open a pressure cap when the radiator is hot Cooling System Maintenance At the intervals shown in the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual the system should be drained flushed and refilled See your authorized dealer for proper cooling system maintenance Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill If the solution is dirty and contains a considerable amount of sediment it should be cleaned and flushed See your authorized dealer for proper draining flushing and re
31. listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station BACK VIEW OF STEERING WHEEL s The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next pre set station that you have The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push pxcccimmedandhis radio prese Dusiebutions button in the center Pressing the top of the switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the CD Player switch will decrease the volume Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next The button located in the center of the right hand control Huc OD the D Bressing the ROLON O OS swlehionee will switch modes to Radio or CD 196 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch changes CD s on the 6 Disc in dash CD changer radio This button does not function for all other radios COMPACT DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the compact discs in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape
32. 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com 811a7ce5 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Programming HomeLink NOTE When programming a garage door opener it is advised to park outside the garage It is also recom mended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal 1 Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons and release only when the indicator lights two dots below House Symbol begin to flash after 20 seconds Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat step one to program a second and or third hand held transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink but tons 811a7ce9 WARNING Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a danger ous gas Do not run the vehicle s exhaust while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause seri ous injury or death ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 WARNING Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate A moving door or gate can cause serious injury or death to people and pets or damage to objects 2 Position the end of your hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the indicator light dot
33. 80 000 asicLimisa Wanany Coverage Basic Limited Warranty Coverage a nl ee Special Extended Warranty Coverage Powertrain Limited Warranty 100 deductible Anti Corrosion Perforation Limited Warranty All Panels Outer Panels eat EE eee Federal Emission Warranty Federal Emission Warranty n add ee ee California Emission Warranty p ae eee ee oe E oq gp cL NOTE Vehicles used as a police vehicle taxi limousine postal delivery vehicle ambulance or rental vehicle are covered only under the 3 year 36 000 mile Basic Limited Warranty 8132e27a U S Vehicles Only ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 389 MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from your dealer They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra tion NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline
34. Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided in the If You Need Customer Assistance section later in this owner s manual Being too close to the steering wheel or instru ment panel during airbag deployment could cause serious injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel If the vehicle has window bags they also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Air Bag System Components The airbag system consists of the following Occupant Restraint Controller Side Remote Acceleration Sensors If Equipped Airbag Warning Light Driver Airbag Passenger Airbag Window Bags above Side Windows If Equipped Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring Knee Impact Bolsters Front Acceleration Sensors e Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners e Occupant Classification System OCS for the Front Passenger Seat Occupant Classification Module Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light Weight Sensors How the Airbag System Works e The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to re
35. Holding the button will bypass stations with out stopping until you release it MUTE Button Radio Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning ON OFF the ignition will cancel the MUTE feature ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 175 NOTE In Hands Free Phone if equipped mode the MUTE button mutes the microphone SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time PSCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan through preset stations in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each preset station before continuing to the next To stop the search press PSCAN a second time RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satel lite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary control to increase or decrease the frequency AM FM Button Radio Mode Press
36. If sunny set the Mode control at 2 Jand press the 33 button on If cloudy or dark set the Mode control at zl Noles necessary If sunny set the Mode control at 2 or 7 then press the R button on If cloudy or dark set the Mode control at 3 No ce is necessary In cloudy or dark weather set the Mode control at If sunny set the Mode control at lor 5i and for snowy or very cold weather requiring extra heat to the windshield use 2 In most cases turning on the Air Conditioning press the button will clear the fog then adjust temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As it gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield If so set the Mode control at 32 or s and adjust temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging 212 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS SS REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer 811a5697 A rotating switch located on the climate control ideti panel turns the rear wiper On or Off Pressing the rotating switch inward activates the rear window washer Rotating the switch will enable one of five intermittent delay times for the rear wiper The delay times range from 20 to 1 second INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 213 If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned CAUTION off the wiper will automatically return to the Park position When the vehicle is restart
37. Inflation Pressure Tires 0 000000 eee 257 Inside Rearview Mirror lees 74 en INDEX 401 Instrument Cluster 0 0 00 cece nee 164 Instrument Panel and Controls 162 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 340 Integrated Power Module sess 347 Interior Appearance Care 0040 339 Interior FUSES 26h de we cR RR eR OR eS EE eS 342 Interior Lighting 0 0 0 0 ees 121 Interior Lights i c RR RR RES 121 Intermittent Wipers lllllleeeeeees 126 Introd ctiotv 424 cd eccrine ad bata pii RR 38 4 Jack Operation 6 0 0 2 0 00 00 0000 288 291 Jacking InstruchOns 4 4 awe oem eere 292 Key Replacement 24 6 24440944 245 4 9 545 REUS 10 Key Sentry ius Kn deere dor ace I RR MUS ee Re E 9 Key In Reminder ces Ilt een 9 Keyless Entry System lessen 19 Keys Knee Bolster ic urn e see bee vag dne 38 Lane Change and Turn Signals 125 164 350 Lap Shoulder Belts llle 29 34 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 57 Liftgate oser aie Pm 26 Lights sia REESE ES 66 120 Airbag coo ouod eV sue er oh Rie e Re ea 51 171 Anti Lock Warning llle 167 Automatic Headlights llle 122 Dack UDp coss rece du ea doe a PASS M te 350 Brake Warning 0 6 ee eee 169 Bulb Replacement 348 349 Center Mounted Stop 200 355 Courtesy Reading 549i eR metos 136 ur
38. Information l l sen 22 Programming Additional Transmitters 22 Battery Replacement spea sieaas pa eniai 24 8 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se ll Security Alarm System If Equipped 24 Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System To Set The Alarm occ LoLo LLL LLL 25 BeltAlert 2222 2c RR m n 36 To Disarm The System llis sse 25 Bede ee AI Teg tant WOMEN eacus Src acn 9 i507 MTM 26 peat Bell EXISIIBE cant Paneth bemea etre ts 9f Windows eene po M CH Power Windows lees 27 Event Data Recorder EDR coc echct iier 52 E e E GC et ARN e Child Restraint ics esee 54 Window Lockout Switch ese eese 2 E Engine Break In Recommendations 64 ll Occupant Restraints ses RR 28 W Safety Tips isses eee n 65 Lap Shoulder Belts 0040 29 Exhaust System L reptkbeezERRERREIS 248 65 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 34 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Second Row Center Seat Belt 34 Vehicle 6 6 6 eee cece nnne 66 Seat Belt Pretensioners 2 5 35 Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The VMehicle i ox pected got gs eere hd Sa DES SY 66 es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 9 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The double sided keys may be inserted into the locks with either si
39. Introduction section to learn about the phone type To complete the pairing process you will need to reference your cellular phone owner s manual One of the following vehicle specific websites may also provide detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone that you have NOTE e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e wWw jeep com uconnect The following are general phone to UConnect System pairing instructions e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted after the voice on beep say Pair a Phone 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se You will be asked to say a four digit pin number which you will later need to enter into your cellular You can enter any four digit pin number You will not need to remember this pin number after the initial pairing process The UConnect system will then prompt you to begin the cellular phone pairing process on your cellular phone Before attempting to pair phone please see your cellular phone s user manual Bluetooth section for instructions on how to complete this step For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 1 being
40. Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 file formats The radio will recognize only files with the mp3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the mp3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates 188 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Ses MPEG Specifi cation Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit rate kbps MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 112 96
41. TELE Goes ias OP det Gbps Grote lad aed 24 167 Alariny Paie etetera Ede B82 Ire ei d der v 21 Alignment and Balance 0006 256 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 6 Antenna Satellite Radio len 194 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 326 327 357 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 236 Anti Lock Warning Light 167 Anti Theft System xxx oe 24 167 Appearance Care sasda eua pE A e a 337 Arming Theft System a na aaan aaan 25 Auto Unlock Doors 0 0000 eee eae 16 Automatic Dimming Mirror 74 78 Automatic Door Locks 0000000 15 Automatic Headlights 122 Automatic Transaxle 0 0 naaa ee eee 221 Automatic Transmission 218 221 332 Adding Fluid seio see Lis 333 Fluid and Filter Changes occi crescesse 334 Fluid Level Check llle 332 Fluid Type ierta ce RE ERR ER 334 360 Gear Ranges s eec ace Raa Race aos ach n 221 Special Additives xus eds ee ees 334 Torque Converter poc esas ehe dns 225 Axle Fluid ee erei a 9 sane bbb a e a 360 nn INDEX 395 Axle Lubrication 0 000000 eee eee 335 Ball Joints 4 4 ee Sod RS AU x RAUS ec 321 Battery occ cw cox me n iq cs uen soe i Reg 318 Chareine oui nerne na Renee ate as 296 Emergency Starting llle 296 Gas Caution llle 296 Keyless Transmitter Replacement 24 Saving Feature Protection
42. The emergency number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for USA Canada and 060 for Mexico The number called may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UCon nect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for USA 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico city and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico city in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance coverage details in the DaimlerChrysler Corporation 24 Hour Towing Assistance Program Guide es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Paging To learn how to page refer to section Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to section
43. and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle coolant You may want to call a service center if your in neutral with the air conditioner turned off until vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the the light turns off If the if the light remains on turn hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the engine off immediately and call for service the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 9 Speedometer Shows the vehicles speed 10 Voltage Light This light monitors the electrical system voltage The light should turn on momentarily as the engine is started If the light stays on or turns on while driving it indicates a problem with the charging system Immediate service should be obtained E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 167 11 Liftgate Open The Gate Open light will illuminate when the liftgate is not properly closed 12 Security Light This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is arming The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on 13 ABS Warning Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System fes which is described elsewhere in this manual This light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and may stay on for approximately 3 seconds If this light remains on or comes on during driving it
44. antenna wire is attached to the motor head unit 7 Firmly press and release the learn or smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manu facturer NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step eight 8 Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button Repeat the press hold release sequence a second time and depending on the brand of the garage door opener or other rolling code equipped device repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device NOTE To program the remaining two HomeLink but tons begin with Programming step two Do not repeat step one For questions or comments please contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Canadian Programming Gate Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator by using the Program ming procedures regardless of where you live replace Programming HomeLink step 3 with the following NOTE If program
45. as soon as possible e Use Mopar auto polish to remove road film and stains and to polish your vehicle Take care never to scratch the paint 338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is finish considered the responsibility of the owner e If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil such as steel wool or scouring powder which will ity of the owner scratch metal and painted surfaces e All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly Special Care with mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil select a nonabrasive non acidic e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month brush or metal polishes Only Mopar cleaners are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid auto e Itis important that the drain holes in the lower edges matic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh of the doors rocker pan
46. assembly of hoses to couplings Therefore oil wetness at the hose coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage Actual dripping of hot fluid when systems are under pressure during vehicle operation should be noted before hose is replaced based on leakage 330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M You are urged to use only the manufacturer s specified hoses and clamps or their equivalent in material and specification in any fuel system servicing It is manda tory to replace all clamps that have been loosened or removed during service Care should be taken in install ing new clamps to insure they are properly torqued Positive Crankcase Ventilation PCV Valve Proper operation of the crankcase ventilation system requires that the PCV valve be free of sticking or plug ging because of deposits Deposits can accumulate in the PCV valve and passage with increasing mileage Have the PCV valve hoses and passages checked for proper operation at the intervals specified If the valve is plugged or sticking replace with a new valve Do not attempt to clean the PCV valve Check ventilating hose for indication of damage or plugging with deposits Replace if necessary 802d4b6b Brake System Power Disc Brakes Front Disc brakes do not require adjustment however several hard stops during the break in period are recommended to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331 WARNING Us
47. at each listenable station before continuing to the next Pressing the AM FM button continues the search in the alternate frequency band To stop the search press SCAN a second time INFO Button Radio Mode Press the INFO button for an RBDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 181 RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satel lite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary control to increase or decrease the frequency AM EM Button Radio Mode Press the button to select AM or FM Modes Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side s
48. been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the button must be pressed each time the engine is started Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy is included in all automatic transmissions A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at a calibrated speed at light throttle It engages at higher speeds under heavier acceleration This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops below a calibrated speed or during acceleration the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages The feature is operational in Over drive and in Drive NOTE The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usually after 1 3 miles 1 6 4 8 km of driving Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is normal Pressing the TOW HAUL button will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive NOTE If the vehicle has not been driven in several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to 226 STARTING AND OPERATING Se the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This
49. both buttons at the same time 4 Test the flash lamps with LOCK feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the key fob with the ignition in the OFF position and the key removed NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the key fob while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm 5 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps Using the Panic Alarm To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF press and release the PANIC button on the transmitter once When the Panic mode is activated the interior lights will illuminate the headlamps and parking lights will flash and the horn will sound To cancel the Panic mode press and release the PANIC button on the transmitter a second time Panic mode will automatically cancel after 3 minutes or if the vehicle is started or exceeds 15 mph 24 km h During the Panic 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Mode the door locks and remote keyless entry systems will function normally Panic mode will not disarm the security system on vehicles so equipped General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful i
50. brake pedal A fuse puller is attached to the inside surface of the fuse panel cover to aid in removing fuses if necessary es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 FLOOR CONSOLE Floor Console Features The Floor Console between the driver s and front pas senger s seat has the following features YELLOW AIRBAG FUSES TOP FUSE BLOCK laa M s 20A RECON FIGURABLE FUSE LOCATION BATTERY TOP LOCATION IGN BOTTOM POSITION 81326fdd Miscellaneous storage compartments Flexible cup holder inserts Portable phone storage bin Portable phone cord routing between lid and base on forward edge 12 Volt battery fed power outlet inside storage com partment Side open armrest lid Tissue holder amp pen holder Coin slots 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Removable CD bin The coin slots are located under the instrument panel center stack Cup Holders The Durango has 8 cupholders Four are located in the center console two are located in the second row armrest and two are located in the right hand quarter panel for third row occupants The four cupholders located in the center console may be removed for cleaning and are dishwasher safe Power Outlet and Portable Phone Storage The console is equipped with a power outlet portable phone storage bin and phone cord routing The phone storage bin can be used when easy access to the phone is needed
51. brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Use an approved trailer harness and connector If a hitch is ordered the proper wiring will be provided When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chas sis structure or tires Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that cannot be fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 274 STARTING AND OPERATING e Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer e Connect trailer lighting and brakes using factory har nesses only Do not cut or splice any wiring to the brake circuits Trailer and Tongue Weight Gross Trailer Weight GTW means the maximum allow able weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo and equipment loaded on the trailer when in actual under way towing condition The recommended way to mea sure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Tongue Weight is the weight placed on the vehicle s trailer hitch by the trailer Always load
52. condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission The torque converter will refill within five seconds of shifting from Park into any other gear position FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION NV 144 Transfer Case Operating Information Precautions The NV 144 is an electric shift transfer case and is operated by the Four Wheel Drive 4WD Control Switch which is located on the instrument panel The NV 144 transfer case provides 2 mode positions All Wheel Drive AWD and 4 Wheel Drive LOCK The NV 144 transfer case is designed to be driven in for AWD for normal street and highway conditions all road surfaces roads When additional traction is required the transfer case 4LOCK position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the 4LOCK position see Shifting Procedure section for specific shifting instructions The 4LOCK position is designed for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4LOCK posi tion on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights Transfer case position indicator lights are located on the instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection If there are no indicator lights on or flashing the transfer case position is All Wheel Drive AWD
53. continue to operate for ten minutes or until the driver s door is opened The accessory features are Power Windows Sunroof and Radio This feature can be turned off by the dealer ILLUMINATED ENTRY Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks All interior lights will illuminate in the vehicle when the doors are unlocked using the key fob The interior lights will remain on for 30 seconds after the last door is closed or until all doors are closed and either the ignition is turned to the ON position or a key fob LOCK button is pressed There is also a battery saver feature that will turn the interior lights off after 8 minutes if the ignition is OFF and a door is left open or the dimmer control is in the interior lights ON position DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks All the doors can be manually locked from the inside by pushing down the door lock plunger located at the rear of the door Both front doors may be opened from the inside with the door lock plunger in the down or locked position 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Power Door Locks For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle WARNING When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use o
54. covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured be cause the airbags are not there to protect you These protective covers for the airbag cushions are de signed to open only when the airbags are inflating If your vehicle is equipped with window bags do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the window bag The area where the window bag is located should remain free from any obstructions If your vehicle is equipped with window bags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require perma nent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See Along with the seat belts front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Window bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions NOTE The passenger front airbag may not deploy even when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classi fication System refer to Occupant Classification System in this section has determined the passenger seat is empty or is
55. dealer If there is a fault present in the OCS the Airbag Warning Light a red light located in the center of the instrument cluster directly in front of the driver will be turned on This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer The Airbag Warning Light is turned on whenever there is fault that can affect the operation of the airbag system If there is a fault present in the OCS both the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light are illuminated to show that the passenger airbag is turned off until the fault is cleared If an object is lodged under the seat and interferes with operation of the weight ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 sensors a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light Once the lodged object is removed the fault will be automatically cleared after a short period of time e The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on collision severity and occu pant size The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The
56. device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic converter will not require maintenance However you must keep the en gine maintained to assure proper operation and prevent possible damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you es STARTING AND OPERATING 267 CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle As with any vehicle do not park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass or leaves can come in contact with a hot exhaust system A scorching odor may be detected if you continue to run a malfunctioning engine The odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs the vehicle should be stopped the engine shut off and the vehicle allowed to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifications should be obtained imme diately To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plu
57. engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315 Engine Oil Filter Selection The manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Drive Belts Check Condition and Tensioner Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic tensioner No belt tension adjustments are required However belt and belt tensioner condition should be inspected at the specified intervals and replaced if re quired See your authorized dealer for service At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule all belts and tensioner should be checked for condition Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts cracks glazing or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication of damage which could result in belt failure Low generator belt tension can cause battery failure Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interference between the belts and other engine components Spark Plugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure proper engine performance and emission control The plugs installed in your vehicle should operate satisfactorily in normal service for the mileage indicated
58. for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h Once the warning is triggered it can be paused if the vehicle speed drops below 5 mph 8 km h The warning will be restarted if the vehicle speed becomes greater than 5 mph The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be en abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position DaimlerChrysler does not recom mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and buckle the driver s seat belt DO NOT start the engine or press the trip reset button 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for the seat belt Warning Light to turn off If during this time the seat belt becomes unbuckled or the engine is cranked or started programming will be cancelled 3 Unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 buckled A chime will sound immediately once the feature has toggled If during this time the ignition switch is turned out of the ON position or the timer expires program
59. from vehicle brake system to trailer system is not accept able The extra load may cause brake failure and you may be injured All Durango models are equipped with an Anti Lock Brake System and require an electrically actuated electric brake controller A blue colored connector for electric brake hookup is located under the instrument panel above the brake pedal Heavy trailer towing also may require breakaway electric trailer brakes anti sway devices or equalizing hitches for safe operation Such devices are commonly required by state law Trailer Tow Wiring The Trailer Tow Package includes a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness located at the rear underbody of the vehicle NOTE Connect trailer lighting and brakes using factory harnesses only Do not cut or splice wiring to the brake circuits The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations RIGHT BIGUUIURN m FEMALE STOPITURN an he PINS PARK Le MALE PIN 813262be 4 Pin Connector STARTING AND OPERATING 277 278 STARTING AND OPERATING RUNNING BATTERY LAMPS BACKUP LAMPS LH STOP RH TURN STOP o TURN ELECTRIC GROUND pu BRAKES 812634c6 7 Pin Connector Cooling System Tips Trailer Towing To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions e City Driving When stopped for short periods of time put transmiss
60. from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint For automatic locking retractor seat belts refer to Automatic Locking Mode earlier in this section If you have trouble tighten ing the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint follow these steps If the buckle is webbing mounted disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened the buckle is not webbing mounted or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the latch plate around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position or use the locking clip provided with your child restraint To attach a child restraint tether strap Route the tether strap over the seat back between the head restraint posts and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Child Restraints in Third Row Seating If Equipped The third seating row is no
61. glass ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75 80b6b3a6 CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped E Folding exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage 76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Electric Remote Control Mirrors The controls for the power mirrors are located on the driver s door trim panel To adjust a mirror turn the control wand toward the left or right mirror positions indicated Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror to move When finished adjusting the mirror turn the control to the center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your right side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the right side mirror Illuminated
62. indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required See your authorized dealer immedi ately 14 Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Light QSJ This light indicates that the engine oil pressure has become too low For a bulb check this light will come on momentarily when the ignition is turned On If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible Immediate service should be obtained See page 311 for more information 15 Tachometer This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute rpm x 1000 16 Gear Selector The electronic gear selector display is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the position of the automatic transmission shift lever and the relation of each position to all other positions For a good signal the 168 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se display will place a box around the selected transmission range PRND21 If the PRNDL displays only the char acters PRND21 no boxes have the system checked by an authorized dealer 17 Trip Odometer The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage To toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer press the Odometer Trip Odometer Button To reset the Trip Odometer press and hold the button while in trip mode until the Trip Odometer resets If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed o
63. jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Do not raise this vehicle using a bumper jack The scissor jack is designed as a tool for changing tires on this vehicle only It is not recommended that the jack be used for service purposes or to lift more than one wheel at a time Preparations Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoiding ice or slippery areas Set the parking brake and place the gear selector in PARK automatic transmission On Four Wheel Drive vehicles shift the transfer case to the 4L position WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel e Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher 292 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME e Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally oppo site the jacking position For example if the right front wheel is being changed block the left rear wheel BLOCK e Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Instructions 1 Remove the spare wheel jack and tools from storage
64. may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure This procedure es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed and needs to be cut NOTE When having the Sentry Key System serviced bring all vehicle keys to the dealer Customer Key Programming You can program new keys to the system if you have two valid keys by doing the following 1 Insert the first valid key into the ignition and turn the ignition to the ON position for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Turn the ignition back to the OFF position and remove the first key 2 Insert the second valid key and switch the ignition to the ON position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound and the Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition back to the OFF position and remove the second key 3 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition and switch the ignition to the ON position within 60 seconds of having removed the second key After 10 seconds a single chime will sound The Security Light will stop flashing then turn on for 3 seconds then turn off The new Sentry Key has been programmed Repeat this process to program up to a total of 8 keys General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject
65. may cause injury could let impurities into the fuel system The volatility of some gasolines may cause a buildup of pressure in the fuel tank that may increase while you drive This pressure can result in a spray of gasoline and or vapors when the cap is removed from a hot vehicle Removing the cap slowly allows the pressure to vent and prevents fuel spray Never allow any lit smoking materials near the vehicles while removing the cap or filling the tank Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running es STARTING AND OPERATING 265 Fuel System Cautions NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed CAUTION against you Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance damage the emission control system An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your dealer for service assistance When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully loaded vehicle when the humidity is low and the temperature is high use a premium unleaded fuel to help prevent spark knock If spark knock persists lighten the load or engine piston damage may res
66. mm when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will move forward approximately 2 5 inches 60 mm when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position Each stored memory setting will have an asso ciated Easy Exit and Easy Entry position The Easy Exit and Easy Entry feature may be automatically disabled if 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M the seat is positioned rearward enough and no benefit from moving the seat any farther rearward NOTE The Easy Exit Easy Entry feature is not enabled when delivered from the factory The Easy Exit Easy Entry feature may be enabled or later disabled by a qualified DaimlerChrysler service representative Tilt Mirrors in Reverse This additional feature provides automatic outside mir ror positioning which will aid the driver s view of the ground rearward of the front doors The outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into Reverse position The outside mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of Reverse position Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mir rors in Reverse position NOTE The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not en abled when delivered from the factory The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature may be enabled or later disabled by a qualified DaimlerChrysler service representative TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
67. move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the LOAD EJECT button to eject all discs in the radio LOAD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will remain in CD mode and display NO DISC LOADED The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF TIME Button CD MODE For CD Audio Play Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display and small clock time display to a large clock time display and small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE For CD Audio Play Press FF Fast Forward once and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is pressed again or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner TUNE Control CD MODE For CD Audio Play Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone Fade and Balance See Radio Mode AM FM Button CD MODE For CD Audio Play Switches the Radio to the Radio mode 186 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Ses RND PTY Button Random Play Button CD MODE For CD Audio Play Press this button wh
68. occupied by someone that is classified in the small child category If your vehicle is so equipped the window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions But even in collisions where the airbags work you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly Here are some simple steps you can follow to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the airbag room to inflate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 4 If your vehicle has window bags do not lean against the door or window airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all
69. perature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible NOTE In cold weather the fan will not turn on in AUTO mode until the engine coolant has warmed up sufficiently This is indicated by the WARM UP DELAY message on the display NOTE The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Overhead Console Customer Pro grammable Features The mode will also be shown in the display and will change as required during automatic operation NOTE The system can be put into recirculate mode without affecting ATC operation This will prevent out side air from entering the vehicle Use this mode to temporarily block out any outside odors smoke or dust 204 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se Manual Control ATC You also may choose to customize your comfort by selecting the fan speed and mode manually Pressing the fan speed button or any mode button places the system into manual operation While in manual operation there are six fan speeds available and the choice of any mode The airflow temperature is adjusted automatically to maintain the desired comfort level You can adjust the temperature by pressing the or TEMP rocker switch FAN Control Use this button to regulate the amount of air deliv ered through the system in any mode you select Press the or side of the button to increase or decrease fan speed Air Conditioning Operat
70. retract fully into the retractor to return the seat belt to the normal emergency locking mode Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove any slack from the seat belt system in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretension ers are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light
71. right side of the driver s seat and on the left side of the passenger s seat Moving the lumbar control lever fore and aft increases or decreases the lumbar support 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Adjustable Head Restraints All Seating Positions Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Pull up or push down on the restraints so that the upper edge is as high as practical at least to the level of the ears To lower the head restraint depress the release button located at the base of the head restraint and push down on the head restraint 8 Way Driver s Power Seat If Equipped The driver s power seat switches are located on the left side of the driver s seat lower side trim The bottom switch controls up down forward rearward and tilt adjustment The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 4 Way Passenger s Power Seat If Equipped The front passenger s power seat switches are located on the right side of the passenger seat lower side trim The bottom switch controls forward rearward adjustment The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment NOTE The 4 way seat does not have an up down adjustment Front Heated Seats If Equipped 81228806 This feature heats the driver and front passenger seats The controls for the front heated seats
72. speeds All road surfaces 4LOCK Four Wheel Drive LOCK Locks the transfer case inter axle differential Forces front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only 4LO Four Wheel Drive Low Range Low speed 4 wheel drive Locks the transfer case inter axle differential Forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Neutral Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle See Recreational Towing for more infor mation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 233 Shifting Procedure NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case 8122be91 NOTE The 4x4 system will not allow shifts between AWD 4LOCK if the rear wheels are spinning no traction In this situation a position indicator light will flash and the original position indicator light will remain ON At this time reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift There may be a delay up to 13 seconds for the shift to complete after the wheels have stopped spinning NOTE Delayed shifting out of the 4LOCK position may be experienced due to uneven tire wear low tire pressure or excessive loading NOTE When shifting into or out of 4LO some gear noise may be heard This noise is normal and is not detrimental
73. symbol on the container along with the proper quality level for your application ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337 Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle wash it
74. that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle GAWR is determined by the component in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Tire Size This is the minimum allowable tire size for your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure Cold This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should 270 STARTING AND OPERATING ME then be determined separately to be s
75. the system may not always work for some 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say send Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect phonebook UConnect phonebook name tag recognition rate is optimized for the person who stored the name in the phonebook You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows and e dry weather condition e Operation from driver seat Performance such as audio clarity echo and loud ness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the UConnect system Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to occasionally loose connection to the UConnect system When this hap pens the connection can genera
76. the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect System The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity section Dial by Saying a Number Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial System will prompt you to say the number you want call es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 e For example you can say 234 567 8901 The phone number that you enter must be of valid length and combination The UConnect limits the user from dialing invalid combination of numbers For example 234 567 890 is nine digits long which is not a valid phone number the closest valid phone number has ten digits e The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call e System will p
77. to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you aren t using it To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push and release the RESUME button Resume can be used at any speed above refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine To Vary The Speed Setting When the speed control is on speed can be increased by pressing and holding the ACCEL button When the button is released a new set speed will be established Tapping the ACCEL button once will result in a speed increase refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine Each time the button is tapped speed increases so that tapping the button three times will increase speed by three increments Tapping the DECEL button once will result in a speed decrease refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine Each time the button is tapped speed will decrease For example tapping the button 3 times will decrease the speed by 3 times the speed listed in the table below refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine To decrease speed while the speed control is on press and hold the DECEL button Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Functions 3 7L 4 7L 5 7L Engage Speed 35 mph 56 km h 35 mph 56 km h 25 m
78. to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS This vehicle has three auxiliary power outlets that can provide up to 20 Amps of current for accessories de signed for use with the standard power outlet adapters The outlet located in the lower portion of the instrument panel has a snap on a plastic cap so that it can be covered when not in use As a safety precaution the outlet in the instrument panel only operates with the ignition switch ON When the optional Cigar Lighter heating element is used it heats when pushed in and pops out automati cally when ready for use To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position There are two additional 12 V 20 total Amps for both outlets power outlets one located in the storage bin of the center console and another located in the right rear cargo area These outlets can be reconfigured by the customer to operate only when the ignition is ON switched battery fed or with the ignition ON or OFF battery fed to allow for cellular telephone charging and or operation while the ignition is off NOTE All accessories connected to these outlets should be removed or turned OFF when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge un
79. too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics chil dren are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult seat belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child Infants and Small Children e This vehicle is not capable of accommodating the installation of a car bed used for carrying newborn babies at the right front passenger seat position If a car bed must be used to transport a newborn baby the car bed must be installed in the second seating row only Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Con
80. will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the Voice Recognition button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile or pager Say the designation you wish to delete After confirmation the phonebook entries will be de leted Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted Delete All Entries in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The UConnect system will play the names of all the phonebook entries e To call one of the names in the list press the Voice Recognition button during the playing of the desire
81. with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accu mulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Windshield Washers The fluid reservoir should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals When freezing weather is anticipated flush out the water in the reservoir by operating the system Fill the reservoir with windshield washer anti freeze not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323 WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution After the engine has warmed operate the defroster for a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the cold windshield Mopar All Weather Win
82. worse You riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat next to your arm in the rear seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See WARNING 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not
83. 11ac69b The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the multifunction control lever Turn the end of the handle to select the desired wiper speed Intermittent Wiper System The intermittent feature of this system was designed for use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other with a variable pause between cycles desirable For maximum delay between cycles rotate the control knob into the upper end of the delay range The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until it enters the LO continual speed position The delay can be regulated from a maximum of about 15 seconds between cycles to a cycle every 2 seconds The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km or less vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during wind shield washer use NOTE Ifthe front wiper is operating when the ignition is turned off the wiper will automatically return to the Park position When the vehicle is restarted the wipers will resume operation Windshield Washers To use the washer push in on the washer knob on the end of the multifunction control lever and hold while spray is desired If the washer knob is depressed whi
84. 121 Belts Drive 0 0 ee eee 315 Belts Seat uacua caa 6 ae Y SEG CR 29 Body Mechanism Lubrication 321 B Pillar Location 222224 p ie EG eae 244 Brake Fluid iue td Race n IR LR anaes dee 360 Brake System sase cle biG ete ne Lb et 236 330 Antl LOCOK uuu aces RERO UR EE aos 236 Disce Brakes 3 x eeu vc p uo a ek eid 330 Fluid Cheek 4 acted ma act racine dick odes 331 FOSES oid booed ae di Se hx P RP OR d ES 332 Master Cylinder a gina nise saad a 331 Parking 22 4 Re bb dt awd iih eas 234 Warning Light 0 00 c esu as 167 169 Brakes s sw YR Caw ae ba E AD RU Y Bi eae A 236 Brake Transmission Interlock 221 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 64 Bulb Replacement 0000050 349 Bulbs Light ensure ce cele ERR a 348 Calibration Compass 0000005 140 Capacities Fluid 2 ice cee esa en 357 Caps Filler Fuel of iano ee ein eee the a ee 262 263 Qil Engine erdire ase aes dks Auer de pt des 313 Power Steering edie ee edad tk metis 320 Radiator Coolant Pressure 324 Car Washes oe qe eg cb spe Seach ede e as Carbon Monoxide Warning Cargo Management System 396 INDEX MM Cargo OFgar z r pyrr see hee eR eek een 156 Cargo Organizer iiec weg c rw eens 156 Cargo Vehicle Loading lessen 268 Catalytic Converter csse llle 266 317 CD Player cserepes e e ne exe 173 179 Cellular Phone llle 78 197 Center High M
85. 2 Windshield Wipers ss occa ctiesiie g trsesess 126 Wiper Blade Replacement 322 Wiper Rear sisse ew e e 9 tersi 212 Wipers Intermittent dhias annwn 126 Wrecker TOWING os 26 cha ee REX Rs 299 NOTES NOTES NOTES NOTES NOTES NOTES
86. 8 FRONT LOAD 423 REARLOAD 1466 FRONT WEIGHT 2576 REAR WEIGHT 2924 LOADED LOADED GAWR FRONT 3600 GAWR REAR 3900 TOTAL LOADED WEIGHT 5500 LBS 8120c425 STARTING AND OPERATING 271 TRAILER TOWING To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Definitions The following trailer towing related terminology defini tions will assist in understanding the subsequent sec tions GROSS COMBINATION WEIGHT RATING GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings include a 68 kg 150 Ib allowance for the presence of a driver Tongue Weight of a trailer is the weight placed on a vehicle s trailer hitch by the trailer GROSS TRAILER WEIGHT GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition 272 STARTING AND OPERATING ME TRAILER SWAY CONTROL is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associ ated with the telescoping motion to dampen any un wanted trailer swaying motions while traveling CAUTION e During the first 500 miles 805 km your new vehicle is driven do not tow a trailer Doing so may damage your ve
87. 98 Rear Rotary Temperature Control 208 Front Mode Control 0 00 199 Front Unit To Rear Unit Chart Rear Temperature Control If Equipped 201 Operating Tips s ke een aw AR baw BES Rear Window Defrosting And Rear Window Operating Tips Chart 211 ISRSIETUMOSIE aapient ies aeeee ree aes ze ll Rear Window Features 0 212 Puis hii ee EUN ind nd E Rear Window Wiper Washer sese 212 Automatic Control 0 00 202 Beat ISO DEROSENE ttn earn edie eiuf gs 162 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS BENEEEEEEEMMMMEMMMC NNI INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 13 2 4 5 2 2 2 2 5 3 2 17 15 16 15 14 13 12 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 1 Headlight Switch 7 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator 13 Traction Control Switch 2 Air Outlets 8 Radio 14 Transfer Case Switch 3 Demister Outlets 9 Climate Controls 15 Speed Control Switches 4 Instrument Cluster 10 Rear Washer Wiper 16 Hood Release 5 Airbags 11 Power Outlet 17 Adjustable Pedal Control Switch 6 Glove Box 12 Heated Seat Switches If Equipped 8147ae7c INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 163 Instrument Cluster 1112 13 3 14 e BB88888 T 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 2524 2322 21 2019 18 17 81464b57 164 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION 1 Fuel Gage The fuel gauge shows level of fuel in tank when ign
88. ACC C 171 Daytime Running 2 212 em ea oa 123 Door Ajar LOB iagares e eyed hor oF buscas 402 INDEX ME Hazard Warning Flasher 286 Headlights 522a eL RR RD 123 HighBeam kx Re a oR BR e 126 High Beam Low Beam Select 126 Instrument Cluster 05 123 164 Interior 1m ban RES ERGO ek es 121 136 License sisscssa ke cinri aA euE Eina 354 Lights On Reminder 000 124 Low Fuel i222 ERR 164 165 Malfunction Indicator 0005 170 Park auaaezdeex Oa va eX eed 123 Passings cgicie cere add ae ets e ree s 125 Seat Belt Reminder 0 000005 165 SOEVICE sc M MEL m 348 Turn Signal 2 2 eserR R4 oe PRAESES Res 125 350 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 164 Washer Fluid 1 262249 wh ead RES 170 Loading Vehicle i aceti ER aee 268 TES 29g emas ea died dS teen SS RP URP ES 244 BEOGKSs res trea alate tance Rc ERE IR 13 Auto Unlock x33 3p Dae nd oF bab kd 16 Automatic Door sisse seda krya NOPE Er a ER 15 Child Protection scesero aac Rea es 17 D OE 23izedkaex te hase SX ORG e ER Dx EE 13 Ignitioti x bs Rx eee eae es EE RA X d 12 IN CYS capua ug arg sot dte sU AS ase c CDS 9 P wetr DOOR es sce eee ae WES Ra eae ER 14 Steering Wheel 2s sauer ea PRS ERST 12 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH 57 Lubricating Oil 336 Lubrication Body eee 321 Lug Nuts iu3a9aceX 43e me3 E i kerren iris 294 Luggage Carrier rsa
89. ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 365 Once a Month At Each Oil Change e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or e Change the engine oil filter damage e Inspect the exhaust system e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Inspect the brake hoses e Inspect the CV joints if equipped and front suspen e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake sion components master cylinder and transmission and add as needed e Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct ERAS Sorin a a operation e Check the coolant level hoses and clamps M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 366 SCHEDULE B ME Schedule B Follow schedule B if you usually operate your vehicle under one or more of the following conditions e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and go driving e Extensive engine idling e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Trailer towing e Taxi police or delivery service commercial service e Off road or desert operation e If equipped for and operating with E 85 ethanol fuel NOTE If ANY of these appl
90. ATOR NO GREEN BOE fore connecting the charger to battery Do not use a BATTERY CHARGE LOW u 1 BATTERY SEED ok fast charger to provide starting voltage CONDITION INDICATOR VEATTEEY ORANGE UNKNOWN Air Conditioner Maintenance EE HABGEMAY For best possible f i diti CHARGE MAY STILL BE P performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer ww at the start of each warm season This service should To determine the battery charge check the battery test include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance indicator if equipped on top of the battery Refer to the test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this illustration time SUFFICIENT TO START YOUR CAR 320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditionin
91. After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained techni cians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the table of contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed index at the rear of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects ee INTRODUCTION 5 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures which could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures which could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number VIN is found on a stamped plate loca
92. Also the power outlet inside the console com partment can be used to power up the phone while it is being stored in the bin To use plug in the portable power recharge cord and place the cord along the opening under the forward portion of the storage bin Close the console armrest lid and plug the power cord into the phone while resting the phone in the bin The power outlet may be used for any portable item with a standard 12 volt power outlet adaptor requiring up to 20 Amps of current The power outlet is on all the time ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 FACTORY INSTALLED ROOF LUGGAGE RACK The side rails between the stantions should be used to tie IF EQUIPPED down cargo Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached NOTE Crossbars are offered by Mopar accessories External racks do not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure that the total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle plus the load on the luggage rack do not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity The load carried on the roof when equipped with a luggage rack must not exceed 68 kg 150 Ibs and should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the loa
93. Always apply parking brake first then place selector in Park position 222 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in P Park Check by trying to move the gearshift lever back and forth without first pulling the lever toward you after you have set it in P Park Make sure it is in Park before leaving the vehicle WARNING Never use Park position on an automatic transmis sion as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage WARNING It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal R Reverse Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop E STARTING AND OPERATING 223 N Neutral Shift to Neutral when vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running Engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing the vehicle except as specified under Towing A Disabled Vehicle coasting or otherwise driv ing th
94. Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Defrosters Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You can feel the air directed against the windshield Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for tread wear or uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights as you turn them on Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Fluid Leaks Check the area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel water oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected the cause should be located and 2 corrected UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS
95. EHICLE M 2 Turn socket 1 4 counterclockwise and free from hous Fog Lights IMB 1 Rotate bulb and connector 1 4 turn counterclockwise 2 Pull bulb off of connector NOTE For foglights ensure that the takeout push fasteners are relocated back in their positions one in the foglight molding and the other in the hydroform 811a88f0 3 Pull bulb straight from socket to remove FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 U S Metric Fuel 3 7L 4 7L 87 Octane 27 Gal 102L 5 7L 89 Octane 27 Gal 102L Engine Oil with filter 3 7L SAE 5W 30 API Certified 5 Qt 4 7L 4 7L SAE 5W 30 API Certified 6 Qt 57L 5 7L SAE 5W 20 API Certified 7 Qt 6 6L Cooling System includes 2 1 Qts 2L for coolant bottle 3 7L without Rear Heat Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula DRE eid 3 7L with Rear Heat Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula ads 199l 4 7L without Rear Heat Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula EE D 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M U S Metric 4 7L with Rear Heat Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula Puy idu 5 7L without Rear Heat Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 NA NA Year 100 000 Mile Formula 5 7L with Rear Heat Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula ie6QE nun NOTE All fluid capacities are approximate ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 RECOMMENDED FLUIDS LUB
96. ESN SID Access With RAQ Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the CD Eject and TIME buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds All twelve ESN SID num bers will be displayed The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed Selecting Satellite Mode in REF Radios Press the MODE button repeatedly until S A appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Selecting Satellite Mode in RAQ Radios Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SIRIUS appears in the display These radios will also display the following e After 3 seconds the current channel name and channel number will be displayed for 5 seconds e The current program type and channel number will then be displayed for 5 seconds e The current channel number will then be displayed until an action occurs E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 193 ACD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Selecting a Channel Press and release the SEEK or TUNE buttons to search for the next channel Press the top of the button to search up and the bottom of the button to search down Holding the TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until the button is released Press and release the SCAN button if equipped to automatically change channels every 7 seconds The radio will p
97. IRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause damage that results in tire failure Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 249 2 Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Underinflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption 3 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The p
98. LE 345 Heating amp Air Conditioning w ATC Only Battery Feed Amplifier Bat tery Feed F19 15 Amp Blue F20 25 Amp Natural Underhood Fuses Power Distribution Center Cavity Fuse Color 1 40 Amp Green 30 Amp Pink Description HVAC Blower 2 Power Outlets 3 30 Amp Pink Rr Wiper Ign R O 4 30 Amp Pink ABS Pump 5 6 50 Amp Red Cabin Htr 1 Diesel Only 50 Amp Red ASD 7 30 Amp Pink Rr HVAC XK Cavity Fuse Color Description 8 40 Amp Acc Delay Seats Green 9 Spare 10 40 Amp Starter JB Power Green 11 30 Amp Pink Cig Ltr T Tow 12 40 Amp EBL Htd Mirror Green 13 40 Amp JB Power Green 14 50 Amp Red Cabin Htr 2 Diesel Only 15 50 Amp Red Cabin Htr 3 Diesel Only 16 25 Amp IPM Coils Natural 17 Spare 18 20 Amp Yel TCM AC Clutch low 346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Fuse Color Description Cavity Fuse Color Description 19 20 Amp Yel Ign Sw 28 25 Amp NGC Injectors low Natural 20 20 Amp Yel PCM Batt Gasoline Only 29 Spare low 30 Spare 21 30 Amp Pink ABS Valves 31 Mini Relay Cabin Htr 1 Rly Diesel 22 Spare Only 23 20 Amp Yel FDCM 32 Micro Relay TCM Rly Gasoline Only low 33 Micro Relay Starter Rly 24 20 Amp Yel Fuel Pump 34 Micro Relay AC Clutch Rly low 35 Micro Relay Fuel Pump Rly m a dd 36 Mini Relay Cabin Htr 3 Rly Diesel Only 2B 2 pom A utem 38 Mini Relay Cabin Htr 2
99. NAL HANDS FREE PHONE 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio CAPABILITY control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait approximately is li ee 5 seconds 8118787a 174 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played The volume can be turned down but not up when the audio system is off and the ignition is ON Mode Button Radio Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player or Satellite Radio if equipped SEEK Button Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped mode Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down The radio will re mained tuned to the new station until you make another selection
100. RICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Engine Coolant Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Or ganic Additive Technology P N 5011764AB or equivalent 3 7 4 7L Engine Oil Use SAE 5W 30 API Certified meeting material standard MS 6395 or equiva lent 5 7L Engine Oil Use SAE 5W 20 API Certified meeting material standard MS 6395 or equiva lent Engine Oil Filter Mopar Engine Oil Filter P N 5281090 or equivalent Spark Plugs Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine com artment Fuel Selection 3 7L 4 7L 87 Octane R M 2 Method Fuel Selection 5 7L 89 Octane R M 2 Method 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Automatic Transmission Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent Transfer Case Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent Front Axle SAE 75W 90 Multipurpose Type GL 5 Gear Lubricant or equivalent Rear Axle SAE 75W 140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent Brake Master Cylinder Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recom mended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
101. RTING AND OPERATING Se 4LOCK Four Wheel Drive LOCK Locks the front and rear driveshafts together Forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only Shifting Procedure NV 144 Transfer Case 8122be8d AWD to 4LOCK or 4LOCK to AWD With the key ON and the engine either OFF or RUN NING rotate the transfer case switch located on the instrument panel to the desired position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 229 NOTE Delayed shifting out of ALOCK may be experi enced due to uneven tire wear low tire pressure or excessive vehicle loading NOTE If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift The indicator light will flash and the current transfer case position will be maintained To retry a selection turn the control knob back to the current position wait five 5 seconds and retry the shift NOTE The 4x4 system will not allow shifts between AWD 4LOCK if the rear wheels are spinning no trac tion In this situation the position indicator light will continue to flash At this time reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift There may be a delay up to 13 seconds for the shift to complete after the wheels have stopped spinning NOTE The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the key is not ON then
102. Rly Diesel n 27 d Lt Brake Stop Lamps 39 Mini Relay VAC Blower Rly 40 Mini Relay ASD Rly es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 Underhood Fuses Integrated Power Module Cavity Fuse Color Description Cavity Fuse Color Description 14 20 Amp Yel Adjustable Pedal 1 Micro Relay Wiper On Off Rly low 2 Micro Relay Wiper Hi Lo Rly 15 20 Amp Yel Ft Fog Lamps 3 Micro Relay Horn Rly low 4 Micro Relay _ Rear Fog Rly BUX Only 16 E Amp Yel Horn 5 Micro Relay Lt T Tow Stop Turn Rly T ZU em Yel Rear Foos 6 Micro Relay Rt T Tow Stop Turn Rly low P 5 7 Micro Relay Park Lamps Rly 18 20 Amp Yel FCM Batt 1 8 10 Amp Red Lt Park Lamps low 9 10 Amp Red T Tow Park Lamps 19 20 Amp Yel Lt T Tow Stop Turn 10 10 Amp Red Rt Park Lamps low 11 Mini Relay Rad Fan Hi Rly 20 20 Amp Yel FCM Batt 3 12 20 Amp Yel FCM Batt 4 low low 21 20 Amp Yel Rt T Tow Stop Turn 13 20 Amp Yel FCM Batt 2 low low 22 30 Amp Pink FDCM Mod 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Fuse Color Description 23 50 Amp Red Rad Fan 24 Mini Relay Rad Fan Lo Rly 25 Micro Relay _ Ft Fog Lamps Rly 26 Micro Relay Adjustable Pedal Rly 27 15 Amp Lt JOD 1 Blue 28 20 Amp Yel IOD 2 Audio low 29 10 Amp Red ORC Ign R S 30 10 Amp Red ORC Ign R O REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb No D
103. S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary Spare tire 31 Overall Diameter in Inches in 215 Section Width in Milimeters mm 65 Aspect Ratio in Percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section Width in Inches in R Construction Code R means Radial Construction D means Diagonal or Bias Construction 15 Rim Diameter in Inches in 242 STARTING AND OPERATING Se EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un der specified operating conditions ie tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra Load or Reinforced Tire Light Load Light Load Tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum Pressure indicates the maxim
104. SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE E INTRODUCTION 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE cece eee hh hm hh nn 4 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS eeeeeeeeeeeeeee hh hh hn Fs STARTING AND OPERATING 4454259994993 or res a a va c rra Rees e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 cece ccc ccc c ccc cece cece nc tn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE cece cece t isuri sE EENES ERREEN 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES cc cece cece eer e eee EEEE eee i hh nn 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE e ccc ccccccccccccecvcecvcecevcecvees 10 INDEX 5 85 9 col arts sos Roe eine 27 Rope boe are Eos S LE rte es QE rS c9 E E MCo 840 bate E EN INTRODUCTION CONTENTS E introduction 0 0 ce eee 4 Vehicle Identification Number 5 Bl How To Use This Manual 4 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 6 la Warnings And Cautions 04 5 4 INTRODUCTION M INTRODUCTION This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE
105. Shifting into Transfer Adjustment scs dorso ed eus Re a 102 Case Neutral IN ss sce Rs 281 Heated ise eee Ges Gh inte alere eee 105 Transfer Case Shifting out of Transfer Lumbar Support llle ees 103 Case Neutral IN e creait eaas emn Rs 282 Memory xia beoe Pe hk Rp Pda ss 114 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 34 en INDEX 407 Shoulder Belts 0 0 0 cc ee ee 29 Wheel Tilt 2 0 0 0 llle 129 Signals Tum resistat terrean eiers 125 164 350 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Snow Chains Tire Chains 5 257 COnDtfols i ics Dea x be eate a X RO CAN TS 194 Snow PlOW van cca e kee asse we che vu 272 Storage Vehicle erased aua e a 381 SNOW URES Arinae EaR x wt eae ded uides 258 Stuck Freep as ds teu dept ea parans 239 Spare Due gc ce ee baba I ge Siw eas Ge bs 252255 Sun Roof l c serene aes tad event aes 149 Spark PUGS 5 cde e expen deg teas 315 Supplemental Tire Pressure Information 257 speed Control i im eere emm e iA ee 132 Synthetic Engine Oil 6 6 6 ee 314 Speedometer i r erse sori 166 STATUE ede ati ie deg us eub REA edet hea 218 Tachometer 0 00 6 167 Automatic Transmission sss 218 Tai Sts 2 gee pace hinds oak ee eae eee ek 350 Emergency Jump Starting 296 Temperature Control Automatic 202 Engine Block Heater 000 220 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 164 Engine Fails to Star
106. TIRES Snow tires should be of the same size and type construc tion as the front tires Consult the manufacturer of the snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed requirement associated with the tire These tires should always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity inflation pressures under any load condition While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types STARTING AND OPERATING 259 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving EJ and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of FRONT tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season E EJ type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main a tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to 5 a smooth quiet ride 8031e864 Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the Maintenance Schedules Section of this manual More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be correcte
107. VOIR CENTER AIR CLEANER RADIATOR POWER COOLANT WINDSHIELD FILTER CAP STEERING BOTTLE WASHER RESERVOIR FLUID 81326172 306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L HEMI V 8 AUTOMATIC ENGINE OIL ENGINE OIL BRAKE FLUID POWER DISTRIBUTION BATTERY TRANSMISSION FILL DIPSTICK RESERVOIR CENTER DIPSTICK AIR CLEANER RADIATOR POWER COOLANT WINDSHIELD RESERVOIR FLUID 81326177 es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 307 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica tor Light on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be p
108. Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward The lights will turn on automati cally Closing the mirror cover turns off the light Heated Mirrors If Equipped Heated mirrors are automatically activated when you depress the rear window defroster switch located on the instrument panel The light will illuminate to indicate that the heating elements are ON Turning OFF the ignition will deactivate the heated mirrors 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Automatic Dimming Driver s Exterior Mirror If Equipped This mirror will automatically adjust for annoying light glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside mirror and can be turned off by pressing the button at the base of the inside mirror HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UCon nect system NOTE The UConnect system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 0 96 or hi
109. X aa Odometer Es dd ale aE ala eR a ans 168 speedometer i449 b RR RR PR E 166 Tachometer genders dhe ass ae Sd Bea ote 167 Gear Ranges ose cata eo hanes ee pe Bea 221 Glass Cleaning is acuerda pe oats Swi ae 340 Grease m 336 Gross Axle Weight Rating 0 269 Gross Cargo Weight eoc agiies i doa aea at 268 GVWR baoe st ela sed Yos e rhe 268 271 Hands Free Phone 00000000000 78 Hazard Warning Flasher 286 Headlights Lies ek fi eee ees ed 349 Delay ix iuuat aea e Pelee Grae don d sos 122 HighBeam s es ces ri 4 ebe oda el ted ELS 126 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 126 Lights On Reminder sss 124 PASSING adus hg pe ent Roe RS mikasa 125 Replacing ee teo beERE eR LR PP RR Ears 349 Heated Mirrors llle 77 Heated Seats eracarri tarer tir ereta EER 105 Heater issus mdp ERE iaei Ea Se EAS 197 Heater Engine Block oneens ra mie ekaine ines 220 High Beam Indicator 0 00050 165 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 126 Hitches Trailer TOWIng ues ee raaa wened xe 275 Homelink Transmitter lees 142 Hood Release llle 118 HOSES 22299 a owe 3 ck REX LEY P 329 Ignition aae ed eed o RR mhet enaa en ck 12 Key sera duced taedis anos dero e od HR e dr og e 9 EOK lt 3 ate G42 Pd RR PSone RP eB 12 Illuminated Entry 0 0 0 eee een 13 Infant Restraint se 0 0 0 0 00 0 ce eee eee 54 55
110. Y icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected PTY name The PTY function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the PTY Program Type mode the PTY mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE Note This Radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism You may eject a disc with the radio OFF If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio OFF the display will show the time of day If you insert a disc with the ignition OFF the display will show the time of day for about 5 seconds then go out If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and 184 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se begin to play when you insert the disc The display w
111. a trailer with 60 to 6576 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle 8020cdo0 Trailer sway control and equalizing hitch are required for tongue weights above 350 Ibs 159 kg Also there are maximum tongue weight ratings that are not to be exceeded as follows e Class IV the receiver hitch type 1200 lbs 544 kg ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 Gross Combined Vehicle Weight Rating GCWR The Gross Combined Vehicle Weight Rating GCWR is the MAXIMUM allowable weight of the towing vehicle including passengers and cargo and the weight of the loaded trailer Calculate the maximum trailer weight MTW by subtracting the towing vehicle s weight in cluding passengers and cargo from GCWR Trailer Towing Hitches With a Class IV Hitch you can tow a trailer with a Gross Trailer Weight of up to 8 900 Ibs 4037 kg depending on your vehicle equipment The Trailer Tow Package in cludes the platform hitch receiver and a 7 lead wiring harness mounted on the hitch Tongue weight must be equal to at least 10 of GTW but no more that 15 of GTW NOTE When towing a trailer the following require ments must be adhered to e GCWR must not be exceeded e Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four 4 ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utili
112. ad surfaces only Driving in the 4LOCK and 4LO positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components The transfer case Neutral N position is selected by depressing the recessed button located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch NOTE The transfer case Neutral N position is to be used for recreational towing only See Recreational Tow ing section for specific procedures on shifting into and out of Neutral N Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights Transfer case position indicator lights are located on the instrument cluster If there are no indicator lights on or flashing the transfer case position is All Wheel Drive AWD and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection 4HI amp 4LOCK The SVC 4WD warning light monitors the electric shift 4WD system If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required en STARTING AND OPERATING 231 WARNING Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the Service 4WD light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning The NV 244 Generation II transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the
113. ading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure for pas senger cars is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar For vehicles other than passenger cars the cold tire inflation pressures are listed on either the shutface of the driver s door the B pillar the Certification Label or in the Tire Inflation Pressures brochure in the glove compartment 811ad dO Tire Placard Location Tire and Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 Tet 1 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 H3 INFLATION PRE 200kPa 29PSI 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI 4 SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Ci 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 the total weight your vehicle can carry 3 the tire size designed for your vehicle STARTING AND OPERATING 245 4 the cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum load
114. als make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and driveability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler group vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance pro cedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 391 Call Toll Free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the World Wide Web at e www techauthority daimlerchrysler com e www daimlerchrysler ca manuals INDEX 3904 INDEX aa ABS Anti Lock Brake System 167 236 Adding Fuel i22 lk RR pis 262 286 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 316 Air Conditioner Maintenance 198 319 Air Conditioning iesse3dhe Rd eR RR RA 197 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 209 Air Conditioning Rear Zone llus 201 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 319 320 Air Conditioning System 197 319 Aut Filter PPP 316 Air Pressure Tires llle 249 257 Amb ag 2rd oo is di eae RR E 38 171 Aitbag Light Awd ped the HESS aod nhe E 51 ATA
115. an cause serious vehicle damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could suggest chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Install chains as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 1 2 mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 45 mph 72 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not install tire chains on front wheels of 4x2 vehicles Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recommended by the manufacturer 258 STARTING AND OPERATING Se These cautions apply to all chain traction devices includ ing link and cable radial chains Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of Durango trucks NOTE The use of class S chains is permitted on Durangos with P245 70R17 tires CAUTION Do not use tire chains on 4x4 Durango trucks equipped with P265 65R17 tires There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle Do not use tire chains on the 4X2 front wheels of Durango models There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body dam age to your vehicle SNOW
116. are located on the center of the instrument panel below the climate con trols The heated seat system allows the driver and front 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M passenger to select from two different levels of supple mental electrical seat heating or no seat heating to suit their individual comfort requirements With the ignition switch in the RUN position depressing the heated seat switch rocker to its momentary High or Low position provides power to the heated seat element and maintains the requested temperature setting If the heated seat switch is depressed to a different position Low or High than the currently selected state the requested temperature setting will change to a new selection If the heated seat switch is depressed a second time to the same position as the currently selected state the seat heater will turn off NOTE The high heat setting will operate for approxi mately a two hour duration After two hours the system will automatically transition to the low heat setting The low heat setting will operate for a two hour duration then the system will turn off Thus a maximum of four hours of operation until the system is reactivated If the low heat setting is initially selected the system will operate for two hours and then turn off If the indicator lamp on the heated seat switch does not light when the switch is depressed or if heated seats does not operate the system should be servic
117. ase 228 NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case Operating Information Precautions Shifting Procedure NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case scr aee aee 233 H Parking Brake 2 2 RR 234 Brake System PTT 236 Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS 236 ll Power Steering li Rocking The Vehicle seen mtn 239 216 STARTING AND OPERATING ME H Tire Safety Information iss nn RR 239 Alignment And Balance iss asse rs 256 Tire Markings cucuscuse cxx pilae o x eg us 239 W Supplemental Tire Pressure Information 257 Tire Identification Number TIN 243 WETire Chains 0 0 0 ee eee 257 Tire Loading And Tite Pressure 2 40 00 44 214 SHOW Ties ys ca du ba Rar ERA wel es 258 Wi Tires General Information 248 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 259 Tire Pressure 24 4 Acc oie CR Ra ERS RR 248 W Fuel Requirements xeseras CREER kes 260 Tire Inflation Pressures 249 Reformulated Gasoline 261 Radial Ply Tr s cs e Rx RR 252 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 261 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 252 MMT In Gasoline sst resdesss eket esene 262 Limited Use Spare If Equipped 253 Materials Added To Fuel 262 Tire Spinning esae Ka ae eae es 254 Adding Fu
118. at the gas cap is properly tightened Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled WARNING A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle or on a truck bed You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle NOTE After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic sys tem can determine if the fuel filler cap is loose improp erly installed or damaged A loose fuel filler cap message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off 264 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION WARNING Damage to the fuel system or emission control Remove the fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap system could result from using an improper fuel slowly to prevent fuel spray from the filler neck tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap which
119. ata Recorder EDR In the event of an airbag deployment your vehicle is designed to record up to 2 seconds of specific vehicle data parameters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment Please note that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys and are otherwise unavailable In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler Corpo ration such investigations may be requested by custom ers insurance carriers government officials and profes sional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organiza tions In the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler Corporation regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or cras
120. ated in step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustra tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 Kg ee STARTING AND OPERATING 247 Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE FRONT REAR occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight EXAMPLE 1 Occupant 1 200 Ibs 865 Ibs 195 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 Ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 248 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading 1 Safety WARNING can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them T
121. ause on each channel for 7 seconds before moving on to the next channel The word SCAN will appear in the display between each channel change Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search NOTE Channels that may contain objectionable content can be blocked Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888 539 7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock ing Please have your ESN SID information available Storing and Selecting Pre Set Channels In addition to the 10 AM and 10 FM pre set stations you may also commit 10 satellite stations to push button memory These satellite channel pre set stations will not erase any AM or FM pre set memory stations Follow the memory pre set procedures that apply to your radio Using the PTY Program Type Button if equipped Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your radio PTY Button SCAN When the desired program type is obtained press the SCAN button within five seconds The radio will play 7 seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next channel of the selected program type Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search NOTE Pressing the SEEK or SCAN button while performing a music type scan will change the channel by 194 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se one and stop the search Pressing a pre set memory button during a music type scan will call up the memory channel and stop the search PTY Button SEEK When the desired progra
122. back on NOTE The display will show a REAR fan speed graph and a REAR temperature graph CONTROL IN REAR This allows the passengers in the second row seats to control the blower speed and temperature by means of the rear control located in the rear of the center floor console as described under the Rear Zone Climate Control NOTE The display will show CONTROL IN REAR REAR OFF This turns the rear system off The control will return to the front system display after approximately 5 seconds if no buttons are pushed while in one of the rear system displays You may also return to the front system display sooner by pushing any button except the POWER REAR TEMP or FAN buttons NOTE The display will show REAR OFF Rear Window Defrosting and Rear Window Washer Wiper See the Rear Window Features section of this book E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 207 Rear Zone Climate Control If Equipped Headliner air comes from the outlets in the headliner Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air Moving the air vane knobs on the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow 811aa87d The rear compartment control uses two rotary knobs one for the temperature control and the other for the fan speed control The mode for the rear air conditioning and heating system is always controlled by the front control unit Fan and temperature can be controlled from the front contro
123. back that is not fully latched in the upright position will not protect you properly es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 To Fold and Tumble the 2nd row 40 seats from the 3rd row fully raise the lever at the rear of the seat to fold the seatback Continue raising the lever to release the floor latches to tumble the seat NOTE The head restraints must be lowered but do not have to be removed to fold and tumble the seats Third Row Seat Bench If Equipped To Fold The Seats Folding the third seat occurs in two stages First the cushion is lifted and moved forward from the pockets at the front of the cushion The cushion will rest onto the floor directly behind the second row seat Second the top of the back is folded forward and rests onto the cushion The back will not fold unless the cushion has been folded forward first 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Achieve Maximum Cargo Capacity Pull the release handles and strap on the second row seats and fold flat After folding the third row seat unsnap the flipper panel on the third row seatback and flip it forward on the backs of the second row seats es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 NOTE Before returning the second row 40 seats to their upright position always snap the third row seat flipper panel s back to the third row seat first NOTE The seat belt buckles are hinged to fold with the seat back WARNING
124. bags fully inflate in about 50 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle The Occupant Classification Module OCM is lo cated beneath the front passenger seat The OCM classifies the occupant into categories based on the measurements made by the seat weight sensors The OCM communicates with the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC The ORC uses the occupant category to determine whether the front passenger airbag should be turned off It also determines the rate of airbag inflation during a collision Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between the seat and the floor pan The weight sensors measure applied weight and transfers that information to the OCM 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e The Side Impact SRS Window Bags are designed to The front passenger seat assembly contains critical com activate only in certain side collisions When the ORC ponents that affect the front passenger airbag deploy with side impact option detects a collision requiring ment Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo the window bags to inflate it
125. cessive The 5 7L engine block heater cord is located on the left exhaust temperatures which can damage your ve side of the engine compartment and rearward of the hicle Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the power distribution center engine running E STARTING AND OPERATING 221 WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 volt electrical cord could cause electrocution AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Automatic Transmission The electronic PRNDL on the instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear selected The selector lever is mounted on the right side of the steering column To drive move the selector lever from Park or Neutral to the desired drive position Pull selector lever toward you when shifting into Reverse Second First or Park or when shifting out of Park Brake Transmission Interlock System This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out of Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed This system is active only while the ignition switch is in the ON position Always depress the brake pedal first before moving the gear selector out of PARK Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from Park or Neutral position into another gear range 5 P Park Supplements parking brake by locking the transmission Engine can be started in this range Never use Park while vehicle is in motion Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range
126. child restraint Refer to Automatic Locking Mode earlier in this section Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s second row seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now available However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to ta
127. communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address Owner s telephone number home and office Dealership name Vehicle identification number Vehicle delivery date and mileage 386 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico 915 729 1248 or 729 1240 Outside Mexico 525 729 1248 or 729 1240 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex pected repairs after your manufacturer s new vehicle limited warranty expires The manufacturer stands be hind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Ser
128. ction only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can either use the combined form voice command Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please re member the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to some one sitting eight feet away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree at the end of this section es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know what your options are at any prompt say Help following the voice on beep The UConnect system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press the Phone button and follow audible prompts for directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the Phone button on the mirror Cancel Command At any prompt after the voice on beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone re fer to
129. d name and say Call NOTE the user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call To reject the call press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone Press the Phone button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when anoth
130. d appropriately Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the load Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward loads This is espe cially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle WARNING Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in personal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack CARGO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The cargo management system consists of a removable cargo liner and removable cargo organizer es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 Cargo Organizer Closed Cargo Organizer Open To operate the cargo organizer dividers insert finger into the hole lift the dividers up and attach netting To close the dividers detach the netting at the top pull on the release latch and push the dividers down to the closed position To open the side cover pull on the cover latch To open the organizer base pull on the center latch 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To remove the
131. d or closed the liftgate closed when you are operating the without using the key To open the liftgate pull out on vehicle the outside handle and lift If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed Do NOT use the recirculation mode Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 WINDOWS Power Windows The control on the left front door has up down switches that give you finger tip control of all four power win dows There is a single opening and closing switch on the passenger doors for passenger window control The windows will operate only when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and for ten minutes after the 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se ignition is turned OFF or the driver s door is opened This feature can be turned off by your authorized dealer NOTE The Power Accessory Delay feature will allow the power windows to operate for ten minutes after the ignition it turned OFF Auto Down The driver s window switch has an Auto Down feature Push the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate t
132. d prior to rotation being per formed 260 STARTING AND OPERATING Se FUEL REQUIREMENTS All engines except 5 7L engines are de signed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality un RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING R M 2 METHOD 87 800dfab leaded regular gasoline having an oc 3 7L 4 7L Engines tane rating of 87 The routine use of pre mium gasoline is not recommended Under normal conditions the use of premium fuel will not provide a benefit over high quality regular gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer perfor mance The 5 7L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfac tory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline hav 800dfab7 ing an octane range of 87 to 89 The manu 5 7L Engines facturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The routine use of premium gasoline is not recommended The use of premium gasoline will provide no benefit over high quality regular and mid grade gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try an
133. de up The keys for your new vehicle are enclosed in a plastic bag with a bar code label affixed to the front The bar code can be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer or a locksmith If you received your keys without the bag ask your dealer to give you the number NOTE Integrated keys key and key fob combined must be cut by the dealer The dealer must have cutters that have enough clearance for integrated keys Key In Ignition Reminder If you open the driver s door when the key is in the ignition lock a continuous chime will sound to remind you to remove the key CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended SENTRY KEY IF EQUIPPED With this system an electronically coded ignition key sends a signal to the vehicle electronics If the electronics recognizes the signal the vehicle will start and continue to run If the system does not recognize the signal the vehicle will start and run for 2 seconds then shut off After six unsuccessful attempts at starting the system will shut down until the correct key is used NOTE If the key is in the ignition switch then all buttons on that transmitter will be disabled The buttons 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es on the remaining transmitters will work If the vehicle is moving 5 mph or more then all the transmitter buttons are di
134. dels You or others could be injured if you leave the Recreational towing of 2WD models is not allowable vehicle naltended is ig the Hann cage m b Towing the vehicle with the transmission in Neutral can Newtral Uy postion without SEY engaging He cause severe transmission damage Removal of the drive parking Drake The tranisten case Meutia LUN position shaft for towing is not recommended since this allows disengages Bots the mo nit dnd fear dne hatta irom transmission fuid to leak out the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move despite the transmission position The parking Recreational Towing 4WD Models brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle CAUTION Vehicles equipped with an NV 144 Transfer Case CAUTION which has no neutral position may NOT be used for recreational towing Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing E STARTING AND OPERATING 281 NOTE The NV 244 Generation II transfer case must be shifted into Neutral N for recreational towing The Neutral N selection button is located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch Shifts into and out of transfer case Neutral N can take place with the selector switch in any mode position Shifting into Neutral N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing CAUTION It is necessary to follow these steps to be certa
135. ding icy snow covered or slippery OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console has the following features 811a7133 e Courtesy Lights e Garage Door Opener If Equipped e Compass Temperature Mini Trip Computer If Equipped 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Courtesy Reading Lights Near the front of the console are two courtesy reading lights Both lights illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is opened when the dimmer control is rotated to the courtesy light position fully upward position or when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter if so equipped These lights are also operated individually as reading lights by pressing the recessed area of the corresponding lens NOTE The courtesy reading lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle If the interior lights are left on after the vehicle is turned OFF they will extinguish after 15 minutes COMPASS TEMPERATURE MINI TRIP COMPUTER This feature allows you to choose between a compass temperature display and one of four trip conditions being monitored US M Button Use this button to change the display from U S to metric measurement units 811a7292 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 RESET Button 811a72a0 When this button is pressed you will hear a confirmation beep Use this button to reset the followi
136. display priority mode will display the song title for each file RW FF CD Mode For MP3 Play Press the FF side of the button to move forward through the MP3 selection TUNE Control CD Mode For MP3 Play Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of Tone Balance and Fade AM FM Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Switches back to Radio mode RND PTY Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Pressing this button plays files randomly SET DIR Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Press the SET DIR Button to display folders when playing an MP3 discs that have a file folder structure Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or move through available folders Press the TUNE control to select a folder Buttons 1 6 CD Mode For MP3 Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load Bject Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Phone section of the Owner s Manual ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 191 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satel lite Radio This service off
137. dry the windshield Temperature Control The temperature of the air is controlled by a slide located on the top center of the control panel Move the slide left or right to change the temperature The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 201 81228299 Rear Temperature Control If Equipped Rotating this knob left to the REAR CONTROL position REAR ay allows the passengers in the second and third row seats to control the blower speed and temperature by means of the rear control located in the rear of the center floor console as described under Rear Zone Control Rotating this knob to the OFF position turns off the rear climate controls Rotating this knob to the right of the OFF position allows the Driver and front passenger to control the rear blower speed and the rear temperature using the front temperature slide The mode front or rear is always controlled by the front mode control For example Panel OFFe REAR CONTROL 80a01401 202 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME mode on the front control will give you air from the outlets in the headliner in the rear Floor mode in the front will give you floor in the rear Rear Window Defrosting and Rear Window Washer Wiper See the Rear Window Features section of this book Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped The contr
138. dshield Washer Solution used with water as directed on the container aids cleaning action reduces freezing point to avoid line clogging and is not harmful to paint or trim Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required 324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO fol low the preceding safety tips Cooling System Inspection Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check face of radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves
139. e filter 3 7L This applies only if your ve hicle is used for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid and X fleet or frequent trailer towing X Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months or 102 000 miles 163 000 km whichever comes first M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 372 SCHEDULE B ME quired Miles 63 000 66 000 69 000 72 000 75 000 Kilometers 101 000 106 000 110 000 115 000 120 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter or at 3 X X X X months whichever comes first Rotate tires X X Change rear axle fluid X Change front axle fluid 4X4 X Inspect brake linings X Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace if neces X sary Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if re X ee SCHEDULE B 373 quired Miles 78 000 81 000 84 000 87 000 90 000 Kilometers 125 000 130000 134 000 139 000 144 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter or at 3 X X X X X months whichever comes first Rotate tires X X X Change rear axle fluid X Change front axle fluid 4X4 X Check transfer case fluid level 4X4 X Inspect brake linings X Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace if nece
140. e number will be displayed Press the STEP button to select the new variance zone and press the RESET button to resume normal operation Outside Temperature Because the ambient temperature sensor is located un derhood engine temperature can influence the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are slowly updated when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph 30 km h or during stop and go driving GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED The HomeLink Universal Transceiver replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that oper ate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates or home lighting It triggers these devices at the push of a button The Universal Transceiver operates off your vehicle s battery and charging system no batteries are needed es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 WARNING A moving garage door can cause injury to people and pets in the path of the door People or pets could be seriously or fatally injured Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety stan dards This includes most garage door opener mod els manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features it could cause injury or death Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www homelink com for safety For additional information on HomeLink call 1 800 information or assistance
141. e of brake fluid that may have a lower initial Brake Master Cylinders The fluid level in the master cylinders should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced or immediately if the brake system warning light is on If necessary add fluid to bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced If the brake fluid level is abnormally low check system for leaks Refer to Recommended Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type boiling point or is unidentified as to specifications may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident WARNING Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching on fire Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture 332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not allow a petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Seal damage may result Brake Hoses Inspection should be performed whenever the brake system is serviced or at intervals specified Inspect hy draulic brake hoses for surface cracking scuffing or worn spots If t
142. e vehicle while in N Neutral can cause severe transmission damage D Drive For most city and highway driving 2 Second For driving slowly in heavy city traffic or on mountain roads where more precise speed control is desirable Use it also when climbing long grades and for engine brak ing when descending moderately steep grades To pre vent excessive engine speed do not exceed 45 miles per hour 72 km h in this range 1 First For driving up very steep hills and for engine braking at low speeds 25 mph 40 km h or less when going down hill To prevent excessive engine speed do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h in this range Overdrive Operation The overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec tronically controlled fourth and fifth if equipped speed Overdrive The transmission will automatically shift from Drive to Overdrive if the following conditions are present e the transmission selector is in Drive e the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem perature e vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the TOW HAUL switch has not been activated 224 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e transmission has reached normal operating tempera ture NOTE If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem peratures the transmission may not shift into Overdrive and will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature Normal operation will resume whe
143. eat will also be sensed The weight of an adult 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se will cause the system to turn the airbag on In this case the OCS has classified the occupant of the seat as an adult An adult occupant needs to sit in a normal position with their feet on or near the floor in order to be properly classified Reclining the seat back too far may change how an occupant is classified by the OCS Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding in the front passenger seat If an adult occupant s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle like the door or instrument panel the weight sensors in the seat may not properly classify the occupant Objects lodged under the seat or between the seat and the center console can prevent the occupant s weight from being measured properly and may result in the occupant being improp erly classified Ensure that the front passenger seat back does not touch anything placed on the second row of seats because this can also affect occupant classification Also if you fold down the seats in the second row check to be sure they don t touch the front passenger seat If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way it should only be serviced by an authorized dealer If the seat is removed or even if the seat attachment bolts are loosened or tightened in any way take the vehicle to an authorized
144. econd elapses and the shift has been completed If any of these requirements are not met prior to depress ing the Neutral N button or are no longer met during the 1 second time then all of the position indicator lights will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the Neutral N button is released NOTE The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the key is not On the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing NOTE Flashing neutral N position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met 284 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION e Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged e Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage internal parts TRACTION When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 2 Slow down if road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Mai
145. ectrical spark could cause the battery to explode During cold weather when temperatures are below freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery temperature must be brought up above freezing point before attempting jump start 6 Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan 298 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING Any procedure other than above could result in 1 Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent 2 Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion 3 Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow hooks WARNING Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck vehicle Chains may break causing serious injury or death WARNING Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks Tow straps and chains may break causing serious injury ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 299 CAUTION Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towin
146. ed the wiper will Use care when washing the inside of the rear win resume operation dow to prevent damage to heating elements Use a Rear Window Defrosting soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping KA A push button type switch is located in the climate parallel to the heating elements Also keep all control panel Press the switch and the rear win objects a safe distance from the window to prevent dow defroster and electric remote control heated mirrors damaging the heating elements if equipped will turn On An amber indicator on the push button will light when the defroster is turned On An symbol will be displayed when the defroster is turned on with an ATC control Push again to turn Off prior to time out The defroster will automatically turn Off after fifteen minutes For ten more minutes of operation push the button again To prevent excessive battery drain use the defroster only when the engine is operating STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures oessesiec reme Rm 218 Automatic Transmission s 218 Normal Starting 000 219 Engine Block Heater If Equipped 220 Bl Automatic Transmission 221 Automatic Transmission l i 221 Bl Four Wheel Drive Operation 226 NV 144 Transfer Case Operating Information Precautions 0 226 Shifting Procedure NV 144 Transfer C
147. ed airbag system for persons with disabilities contact your autho nance free if any of the following occurs have e an authorized dealer service the system promptly Do not place or hang any items such as add on video players on the right front passenger seat back The additional weight may cause the Occupant 1 Classification System to be unable to correctly classify the right front e The airbag light does not come on or flickers during occupant This could allow the passenger frontal airbag to inflate when it is the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first not desired turned on You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters a 2 i It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure e The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system interval 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e The light flickers or comes on and remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the airbag control mod ule may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your dealer if the fuse is good Event D
148. ed airflow setting e Set the front blower control to any desired speed e Press the Snowflake A C button which is located to the right of the temperature control slide An indicator light on the Snowflake A C button shows that the air conditioning is On e Press the Snowflake A C button a second time to turn the air conditioning Off NOTE The compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for several seconds Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed when the com pressor is on This is a normal occurrence since the compressor will cycle on and off to maintain comfort and improve fuel economy Front Blower Control FRONT e 80a01400 in recirculation mode The Front Blower controls the amount of air delivered to the passenger compartment There are four blower speeds The fan speed increases as you move the control clock wise When the front blower control is turned to OFF the blower will be turned off and the system will be positioned Front Mode Control The mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribution 4 7 s A 811b8660 NOTE To improve your selection choices the system allows you to operate at intermediate positions between the major modes These intermediate positions are iden tified by the small dots and give an even blend of both modes INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 199 Recirculation Mode Panel or Bi Level e Select e
149. ed by a qualified technician Second Row 40 20 40 Seat Fold and Tumble The 40 20 40 seat configuration is standard on all mod els This seat is equipped with a unique fold and tumble feature The 40 seatbacks have spring loaded hinges which assist with the folding of the seatbacks Second row leather seats have seatback recliners at the 40 seating positions Raising the lever allows the seat back to be reclined an additional 11degrees ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 To fold the 20 seatback pull the strap forward to release the seatback Fold the seatback down for use as an armrest or to carry cargo When returning the seatback to the upright position push the seatback rearward to latch the seatback Pull the seatback forward to ensure that it is locked in the upright position To Fold the 40 seatbacks fully raise the lever on the side of the seat to release the seatback The seatback can now be folded into the down position for use as a cargo floor or the seat can now be tumbled forward to allow access to the rear of the vehicle 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING To Tumble the 40 seat fully raise the lever on the side of the seat to release the floor latches and tumble the seat The 20 seatback contains the center shoulder belt NOTE The seatback must be fully folded into the down position to allow the lever to be raised enough to release the floor latches A 20 seat
150. ed into some gasoline to increase octane Gasolines blended with MMT provide no performance advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number without MMT Gasolines blended with MMT reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system performance We recom mend that gasolines free of MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gaso line retailer whether or not his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than allowed in the United States MMT is pro hibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines Materials Added To Fuel All gasolines sold in the United States are required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and would result in unnecessary cost There fore you should not have to add anything to the fuel ADDING FUEL NOTE If fuel is poured from a portable container the container should have a flexible nozzle long enough to extend into the fuel filler tube CAUTION To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full ee STARTING AND OPERATING 263 NOTE Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication th
151. ed into the CD Player and the display will show the time of day SEEK Button CD Mode Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track on the CD Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current track or return to the beginning of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection MUTE Button CD Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers 178 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Ses SCAN Button CD Mode Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track To stop the scan function press the button a second time EJECT Button CD Mode Press this button and the disc will unload and 4 move to the entrance for easy removal The unit will switch to the last selected mode If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds it will be reloaded The radio mode will continue to appear TIME Button CD Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD playing time to time of day RW FF CD Mode Press and hold the FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner NOTE RND Button Random Play Button CD Mode Press this butt
152. ed modifications or service procedures to the front passenger seat assembly its related compo nents or seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash This e Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat cover e Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar e At no time should any supplemental restraint system SRS component or SRS related component or fas tener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar could result in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an acci dent A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS If A Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy the airbags when the impact sensors detect a moderate to severe frontal collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then immediately deflate 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy a
153. ed vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWR s for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWR s vehicle loading and trailer towing see the Vehicle Loading section of this manual To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX 246 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ib since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ib 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calcul
154. ee 125 To Vary The Speed Setting 133 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 126 To Accelerate For Passing 134 Windshield Wipers ys c ee 126 W Overhead Console 6 26 cae res 135 Windshield Washers llle 127 Courtesy Reading Lights 136 72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se lll Compass Temperature Mini Trip Computer 136 To Put Into a Calibration Mode 140 US M Button eee 136 Outside Temperature 00 0 142 Reset Button pss csee erae ere s e ia ex 137 W Garage Door Opener If Equipped 142 Global Reset ck ers eR pamira pde 137 Programming Homelink 144 Step Button acies eas paw Es ee as 138 Canadian Programming Gate Programming 146 Average Fuel Economy AVG ECO 138 Using Homelink 000 147 Distance To Empty DTE 138 Erasing Homelink Buttons 147 Trip Odometer ODO sssss 139 Reprogramming a Single Homelink Button 148 Elapsed Time ET x mn YR 139 Security chase eA ek UP ea e ERAGE SES 148 C T BOHR aura esa ehe ninpi E es 139 W Power Sunroof If Equipped 149 Compass Temperature Display 140 Express Open Feature 0005 149 Automatic Compass Calibration
155. eed not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects To unlock the doors and liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob once to unlock only the driver s door or twice to unlock all the doors and liftgate When the UNLOCK button is pressed the illuminated entry will initiate and the parking lights will flash on twice The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed key fob 2 Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds but not longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the UNLOCK button A single chime will sound to indicate that this feature has changed 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK button on the keyfob NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm 5 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps To lock the doors and liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the key fob to lock all doors and l
156. el e m Ba we A RS 262 Tread Wear Indicators 254 Fuel System Cautions siis 265 Replacement Tires llle 255 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 266 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 217 W Catalytic Converti ausos spere aee was 266 Trailer Towing Requirements 276 B Vehicle Loading usa era wea E nme 268 Trailer Tow Wiring sees 277 Certification Label sins sdi a aas 268 Cooling System Tips Trailer Towing 278 Cub Weight sa cate eee eee skewed 269 S SHOW PlIOW dco vee seeks Stack par Ae eg d 279 Loading 2 224 x e RR eR 269 Dodge Durango Models B Trailer Towing acce xke Ra CREE 271 MH Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc Definitions 24 4 44444 o bh RR 271 Recreational Towing 2WD Models Trailer And Tongue Weight 274 Recreational Towing 4WD Models Gross Combined Vehicle Weight Rating B Traction iaxcsa REESE eR KES ME am E Equipment Identification Plate 284 Trailer Towing Hitches 275 Trailer Towing Information Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings o i esearch a eure eos 275 218 STARTING AND OPERATING Se STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING The starter should not be operated for more than 15 second intervals Waiting a few seconds between such Do not attempt to push or tow
157. els If Used Primarily For Off Road Operation Every 50 hours of use ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313 Dusty Conditions Driving through dust laden air increases the problems of keeping abrasive materials out of the engine Under these conditions special attention should be given to the engine air cleaner and the crankcase inlet air cleaner The crankcase ventilation system should also be checked periodically Make sure that these units are always clean This will tend to reduce to a minimum the amount of abrasive material that may enter the engine Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacture only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Use Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 Engine Oil Identification API Symbol There is a symbol to aid you in selecting the proper engine oil This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacture only recommends API Certified engine oils that meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Stan dard MS 6395 Use Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting the specifi cation MS 6395 Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade For 3 7L 4 7L engines SAE 5W 30 engine oil is recom mended for all operating temperatures For 5 7L en gines SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for a
158. els and liftgate be kept clear brushes that may damage the wheels protective fin and open ish es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339 e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as possible Your dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Interior Care Use Mopar Fabric Cleaner to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use Mopar Vinyl Cleaner to clean vinyl upholstery and trim Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they ma
159. er formed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged A loose fuel filler cap message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas 308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states which have an I M Inspection and Maintenance requirement this check verifies the following the MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD On Board Diagnostic system is ready for testing Normally the OBD system will be ready The OBD s
160. er call is in progress Therefore the user can only either answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently in a call press the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to section Toggling Between Two Calls To combine two calls refer to section Conference Call Place Retrieve a Call from Hold To put a call on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep which will indicate that the call has been placed on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Voice Recogni tion button whi
161. er Memory System If Equipped 114 Setting Memory Positions And Linking Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory 115 Memory Position Recall lius 116 To Disable A Transmitter Linked To Memory 116 Self Limiting Control lille 117 Driver Easy Exit And Easy Entry Control 117 Tilt Mirrors In Reverse 118 ll To Open And Close The Hood 118 lalliphiS o RM RR A 120 Interior Lights 4 ce my erem 121 Battery Saver 121 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 71 Headlight Delay iare e 122 W Traction Control Switch If Equipped 128 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 122 W Tilt Steering Column n naana xo der e xs 129 Headlights Parking Lights Panel Lights 123 W Driver Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 130 Illuminated Entry sada be ae 123 Adjustment Daytime Running Lights Canada Only 123 W Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 132 Lights On Reminder 124 To Ac yate is be enes CER eR es 132 Fog Lights If Equipped 124 To Set At A Desired Speed iius 132 li Multifunction Control Lever 124 To Deactivate s ceu speech RR awe 132 Turn Signals ee esccses sy ire Ya EYE 125 To Resume Speed i cR 444 25 133 Passing Light 6 0 6 0 0 0 e e
162. er than average you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in the desired position Pull the seatback forward to ensure that it is locked in the upright position WARNING A 20 seatback that is not fully latched in the upright position will not protect you properly Second Row Center Seat Belt The center seating position in the second row has a seat belt assembly that can be converted from the normal emergency locking mode to the automatic locking mode The seat belt should only be used in the automatic locking mode when a child seat is installed at this seating location ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 When sitting in this seating location ensure the seatback is fully engaged with the seatback latch by pushing rearward on the center seatback until you hear a click that signals latch engagement Automatic Locking Mode To convert from the normal emergency locking mode to the automatic locking mode grasp the shoulder belt portion and pull all of the webbing out of the retractor Allow some of the webbing to retract into the retractor as the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound to indicate the seat belt is now in the automatic locking mode Once the automatic locking mode has been activated you will not be able pull the webbing back out of the retractor To disengage the automatic locking mode simply allow the seat belt to
163. eriods of time without discharging the vehicle s battery The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control up brighter or down dimmer When the headlights are ON you can supplement the brightness of the odometer trip odom eter radio and overhead console by rotating the control up until you hear a click This feature is termed the Parade mode and is useful when headlights are re quired during the day Battery Saver To protect the life of your vehicle s battery Load Shed ding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights If the ignition is off and any door is left ajar for eight minutes or the dimmer control is rotated upwards for 15 minutes the interior lights will automatically turn off 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled off the exterior lights will automatically turn off after 8 minutes If the headlights are turned on and left on for 8 minutes while the ignition is off the exterior lights will automatically turn off NOTE Battery Saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is ON NOTE While the engine is running the system will deactivate the Fog Lights and Heated seats if a low battery system voltage is detected Headlight Delay To aid in your exit your vehicle is equipped with a headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for 90 seconds This delay is initiated when the ignition
164. ers up to 100 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios System Activation To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com Please have the following informa tion available when activating your system 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Credit card information 3 Your Vehicle Identification Number Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Num ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio system To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps 192 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se ESN SID Access With REF Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the Eject or CD Eject depending on the radio type and Time buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds The first four digits of the twelve digit ESN SID number will be displayed Press the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN SID digits have been displayed The SEEK DOWN will page down until the first four digits are displayed The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed
165. ew thousand miles of operation This is a normal part of the break in and is not an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Exhaust System WARNING Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide an ex tremely toxic gas that by itself is colorless and odorless To avoid inhaling these gases the follow ing precautions should be observed e Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area e It may be necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for more than a short period If so adjust your climate control system to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed and the controls in any position except OFF or RECIRC e The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Be aware of changes in the sound of the exhaust system exhaust fumes detected inside the vehicle or damage to the underside or rear of the vehicle Have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adja cent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace or adjust as required 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Safety
166. f vehicle equipment may cause severe personal inju ries and death ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 As a safety feature the doors will not lock when using the door lock switches during the following conditions e The driver s door is open while the key is in the PEE ignition Automatic Door Locks If this feature is enabled your door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h This feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant and can be disabled by using the following procedure Vehicles equipped with power door locks can be locked or unlocked from inside by either the use of the doorlock 1 Enter your vehicle and Close all doors switches located on the front doors or by pressing the LOCK or UNLOCK buttons on the Remote Keyless Entry key fob 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seat belt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this programming procedure 3 Place the key into the ignition 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 4 Within 10 seconds cycle the key from the OFF position to the ON position four times ending in the ON position Do not start the engine 5 Within 30 seconds press the driver s door lock switch in the LOCK direction 6 Asingle chime will be heard to indicate the feature has been disabled 7 To re activate this feature repeat the above steps 8 If a chime is n
167. f a problem with the A Electronic Throttle Control system If a prob lem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see your dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on for 15 seconds as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 22 Door Ajar The Door Ajar light will illuminate when any door is open NOTE A chime will sound if the vehicle is rolling and a door has been opened 23 BRAKE System Warning Light This light will light when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and will remain on for a few seconds If the light stays on it may be an indication that the parking brake has not been released or there is a low brake fluid level If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction In this case the light will 170 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS See remain on until the condition has been corrected If the parking brake i
168. few minutes Once the hot air has been expelled close the windows and set the mode selector to the Recirculation panel or Recirculation Bi level position When a comfort able condition has been reached choose a mode position and adjust the temperature control and blower speed as necessary to maintain comfort For high humidity condi tions it may be necessary to remain in the Recirculation mode to maintain comfort Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning on the Air conditioning pressing the snowflake button will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield by using MIX Mode position on the control Adjust the temperature control 210 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M and blower speed to maintain comfort Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the defrost mode Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging Summer Operation Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coo
169. ff and the compass will function normally Manual Compass Calibration NOTE To ensure proper compass calibration make sure the compass variance is properly set before manu ally calibrating the compass If the compass appears erratic and the CAL symbol does not appear you must manually put the compass into the Calibration mode To Put Into a Calibration Mode Turn on the ignition and set the display to Compass Temperature Press and hold the RESET button for 5 seconds to change the display to VAR compass variance mode holding the button 5 additional seconds will display CAL compass calibration mode When the CAL ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 symbol is displayed complete one 360 degree turn in an id area free from large metal objects or power lines The i CAL symbol will turn off and the compass will function normally Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic north and geographic north In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic north is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings If this occurs the compass variance must be set according to the Compass Variance Map COMPASS VARIANCE MAP 8040bf97 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To set the variance Turn the ignition ON and set the display to Compass Temperature Press and hold the RESET button approximately five seconds The last vari ance zon
170. filling of your vehicle s cooling system Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community Do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground Prevent ingestion by animals and children If ingested by a child contact a physician Ij immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately 326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M vae pe ey ey This vehicle has been factory filled with an Ethylene ESDEION Glycol based engine coolant with long life corrosion e Mixing of coolants other than specified engine inhibitors called HOAT for Hybrid Organic Additive coolant may result in engine damage and de Technology Follow the Maintenance Schedule for the crease corrosion protection If a non HOAT cool recommended coolant change intervals Refer to Recom ant is introduced into the cooling system in an mended Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct emergency it should be replaced with the speci fluid type fied coolant as soon as possible Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator This vehicle has not been designed for use w
171. front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take place Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case When operating your vehicle in 4LO the engine speed is approximately three times that of the AWD or 4LOCK positions at a given road speed Take care not to over speed the engine and do not exceed 40 km h 25 mph Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit 232 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the Neutral N position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case Neutral N position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below AWD Normal All Wheel Drive High Range Employs inter axle differential Allows front and rear wheels to rotate at different
172. fully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un mute Mute off When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 e Press the Voice Recognition button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Mute off Information Service When using AT amp T Wireless Service dialing to phone number 121 you can access voice activated automated system to receive news weather stocks traffic etc related information Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows on going calls to be transferred to your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongo ing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the Voice Recognition button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electro
173. g You could damage your vehicle TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use of safety chains is recom mended Attach towing device to main structural mem bers of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed Four Wheel Drive Vehicles The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Provided that the transmission is operable tow with the transmission in Neutral and the ignition key in the OFF position along with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on the ground The speed must not exceed 30 mph 50 km h and the distance must not exceed 15 miles 25 km If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles 25 km it must be towed on a flatbed or with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground or with the front end raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly 300 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME NOTE Towing the vehicle at more than 30 mph 50 km h or for more than 15 miles 25 km can cause severe transmission damage MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Engine Compartment 3 7L V6 304 Bl Engine Compartment 4 7L V 8 305 ll Engine Co
174. g Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar bon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro tection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified DaimlerChrysler Dealership a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321 WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Recommended Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Front Suspension Ball Joints The ball joints and seals should be inspected whenever the vehicle is serviced for other reasons Damaged seals should be replaced to prevent leakage or contamination of the grease Drive Shaft Constant Velocity Joints All four wheel drive models are equipped with four constant velocity joints Periodic
175. g wires disconnected or removed e Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating condi tions e Do not allow vehicle to run out of fuel 268 STARTING AND OPERATING Se VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration Regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door o 8120c1d2 This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and shows the Month Day and Hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options and cargo The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems Total load must be limited so that GVWR is not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo ee STARTING AND OPERATING 269 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so
176. gher For UConnect Customer Support call 1 877 855 8400 or visit the UConnect website www chrysler com uconnect UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s micro phone for private conversation The UConnect phonebook enables you to store up to 32 names and four numbers per name Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language This system is driven through your Blue tooth Hands Free profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 each other without wires or a docking station so UCon nect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages as equipped The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the system and the control buttons that will enable you to access the system The diagram below shows the mirror with the appropriate buttons Individual button behavior is discus
177. h the parking brake or the gear selector lever Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle BRAKE SYSTEM In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function The effort required to brake the vehicle will be significantly increased over that required with the power system operating If either the front or rear hydraulic systems lose normal capability the remaining system will still function with some loss of braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and activation of the Brake Warning Lamp and the ABS Lamp during brake use Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS This Anti Lock Brake System is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a separate com puter to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces ee STARTING AND OPERATING 237 WARNING Anti Lock Brake Systems contain sophisticated elec tronic equipment It may be susceptible to interfer ence caused by improperly installed or high output The system s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to provide regulated hydraulic pressure The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation which is
178. h your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Don t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h 252 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Radial Ply Tires Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle stalled at the first opportunity WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When two or more tread wear indicators poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or 6 in case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs appear in adjacent grooves the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and los
179. he call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is using e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais if so equipped e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change op eration only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable The phone pairing is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is only supported in the USA NOTE
180. he switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the window lock button To enable the window controls press the window control button again OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers knee bolsters front airbags for both the driver and front passenger and if equipped left and right side curtain airbags for the driver and passengers seated next to a en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 window If you will be carrying children too small for adult size seat belts your seat belts or the LATCH feature refer to the Child Restraint section in this manual can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly
181. here is any evidence of cracking scuffing or worn spots the hose should be replaced immediately Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place with possible burst failure WARNING Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure You could have an accident If you see any sign of cracking scuffing or worn spots have the brake hoses replaced immediately Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature 180 F 82 C This occurs after at least 15 miles 24 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be tween the fingertips To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly the following procedure must be used ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature 2 The vehicle must be on level ground 3 Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal 4 Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear position ending with the lever in P Park 5 Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated 6 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat ing temperature Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on both sides of the dipstick If the fluid is low add as required into the dipstick tube
182. hes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the US govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corpora tion to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a e DaimlerChrysler Corporation product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data Parameters that May Be Recorded THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Diagnostic trouble code s and warning lamp status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system Airbag disable lamp status if equipped Iime of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Seatbelt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed Engine control status including engine speed Cruise control status Traction stability control status 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time babies and children
183. hicle e When first towing a trailer limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h during the first 500 miles 805 km of towing Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Certification label located at the driver s door for the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating es STARTING AND OPERATING 273 WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible e Be sure the trailer is loaded heavier in front with 60 to 65 of the weight in front of the axle s Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury Trailer
184. hild restraint If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it should not be necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 it tight if necessary If the seat belt has an automatic locking retractor it will have a distinctive label Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is all extracted
185. ield Wiper Blades 322 B Fuse Block 1 eee ee 341 Windshield Washers ole ole bees cas 322 Interior FUSES ux svo Re oe dx 342 Exhaust System eee 323 Underhood Fuses Power Distribution Center 345 Cooling System eee 324 Underhood Fuses Integrated Power Module 347 Emission Related Components 329 Bl Replacement Light Bulbs 348 W Bulb Replacement 0 00000 349 Brake System 20 04 scs ec eR 330 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 303 Headlights Parking Turn Signal 349 Bl Fluids And Capacities sees 357 Rear Side Marker Tail Lights Turn Signals And ll Recommended Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Backup Lights Replacement 350 l X TS 359 Licenselights eese 354 Enpe dtc sd ries e don Sy Medea vd ay t 359 Center High Mounted Stoplight 355 Chassis reed i tassi x EPA CRSE e Pues 360 Fog Lights esee Det e cv ER 356 304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 7L V6 AUTOMATIC ENGINE OIL ENGINE OIL BRAKE FLUID POWER DISTRIBUTION BATTERY TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK DIPSTICK FILL RESERVOIR CENTER AIR CLEANER RADIATOR POWER COOLANT WINDSHIELD RESERVOIR FLUID 81326119 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 305 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4 7L V 8 AUTOMATIC BATTERY TRANSMISSION ENGINE OIL ENGINE OIL BRAKE FLUID POWER DISTRIBUTION DIPSTICK DIPSTICK FILL RESER
186. iftgate If the ignition is OFF when the doors are locked the parking lights will flash on once and the horn will chirp once Horn Chirp Programming The horn chirp feature will be shipped from the assembly plants activated If desired this feature can be disabled by using the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on the key fob 2 After holding the LOCK button for four seconds also press the PANIC button within 6 seconds A single chime will sound to indicate that this feature has changed 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 To reactivate this feature repeat the above steps 5 Test the horn chirp feature while outside of the ve hicle by pressing the LOCK button on the key fob with the ignition in the OFF position and the key removed NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm 6 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps Flash Lamps with Lock Programming 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob 2 After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds also press the LOCK button within 6 seconds A single chime will sound to indicate that this feature has changed 3 Release
187. ile the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature If the RW button is pressed the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing Press the RDN button a second time to stop Random Play BUTTONS 1 6 CD MODE For CD Audio Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load Eject Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported media disc types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CD ROM CD R and CD RW Supported medium formats file systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 15 ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 187 e Maximum number of files 255 e
188. ill show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 SEEK Button CD MODE For CD Audio Play Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection MUTE Button CD MODE For CD Audio Play Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers SCAN Button CD MODE For CD Audio Play Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode For CD Audio Play LOAD EJECT Load Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays LOAD DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading LOAD ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 185 LOAD EJECT Eject Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
189. in that the transfer case is fully in Neutral N before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts 1 Bring vehicle to a complete stop 2 Shut engine OFF 3 Turn the ignition key to the ON position without starting the engine 4 Depress brake pedal 5 Shift automatic transmission to Neutral N 6 Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object depress the recessed transfer case Neutral N button for 4 seconds 7 After shift is completed and the Neutral N light comes on release Neutral N button 8 Start engine 9 Shift automatic transmission into Reverse R 10 Release brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 282 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in Drive D 12 Turn ignition key to the unlocked OFF position 13 Shift automatic transmission into Park P 14 Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar NOTE Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to depressing the Neutral N selection button and must continue to be met until the 4 seconds elaspes and the shift has been completed If any of these requirements with the exception of 3 Key ON are not met prior to depressing the Neutral N button or are no longer met during the 4 second timer then the Neutral N indicator light will flash continu ously until all requirements are met or until the Neutral N button is released
190. in the Maintenance Chart New plugs should be installed at this mileage The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug Check the Vehicle Emissions Control Information label for the proper type of spark plug for your vehicle 316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or CAUTION When replacing plugs do not overtighten You could damage them and cause them to leak Ignition Cables Replace the ignition cables 5 7L engines only at the mileage interval shown in the maintenance charts Engine Air Cleaner Filter Under normal driving conditions replace the air filter at the intervals shown on Schedule A If however you drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe con ditions the filter element should be inspected periodi cally and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on Schedule B maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Fuel Filter A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling limit the speed at which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank frequent filter replacement may be necessary
191. ine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329 D Maintain coolant concentration at 50 HOAT ethyl ene glycol engine coolant minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine E Make sure that the radiator and coolant bottle over flow hoses are not kinked or obstructed F Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also G The thermostat should not be changed for summer or winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance Emission Related Components Fuel System Hoses And Vapor Vacuum Harnesses When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard and brittle rubber cracking checking tears cuts abrasions and excessive swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber Particular attention should be given to examining hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust mani fold Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present NOTE Fluids such as oil power steering fluid and brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to ease the
192. ine control system It also could affect fuel economy and driveability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required 27 Airbag Indicator The indicator lights and remains lit for 6 to 8 9 seconds when the ignition is first turned ON If the light does not come on when the ignition is first turned on or the light stays on or comes on while driving have the airbag system checked by an authorized dealer 28 4LO Indicator Indicates when transfer case is in 4LO position 29 SVC Service 4WD Indicator The SVC 4WD lights will come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and will stay on for 2 seconds If the light stays on or comes on during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required 30 Cruise Light Speed Control This indicator lights when the electronic speed control system is turned on 31 TOWIHAUL The TOW HAUL button is located at the end of the gear shift lever This light will illuminate when the TOW HAUL button has been selected 32 4LOCK Indicator Indicates transfer case is in 4LOCK position 172 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Ses 33 Odometer Trip Odometer Button Press this button to toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer display Holding the button in resets the trip odometer reading RADIO RECEPTION INFORMATION AM Reception AM radio signals usua
193. ing an infant or child restraint weight and height limits A rearward facing infant restraint should only be e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may restraint in the front seat may be struck by a not work when you need it deploying passenger airbag which may cause se vere ot fatalto the infant e The second row outside seating positions and all third row seats have cinching latch plates The second row center position has an automatic locking retractor These are designed to keep the lap portion tight ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the seat belt has a automatic locking retractor it will have a distinctive label Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is all extracted from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the
194. ion Press this button to turn on the air conditioning compressor A snow flake symbol in the display shows that the compressor is on Compressor operation is automatic when you press the AUTO button and no snowflake is shown The compressor can operate at any temperature above 32 F 0 C NOTE The compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for several seconds Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed when the com pressor is on This is a normal occurrence since the compressor will cycle on and off to maintain comfort and improve fuel economy Recirculate Button Press this button to recirculate the air inside the vehicle Outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle Use this mode to temporarily block out any outside odors smoke dust or when rapid cooling of the interior is required E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 205 Manual control of Recirculation is possible only in Panel Floor and Bi Level modes It will not operate in Mix or Defrost modes The recirculation symbol will flash three times indicating recirculation is not available in these modes NOTE If the interior of the windows begin to fog press the recirculate button to return to outside air Some conditions will cause captured interior air to fog win dows when in recirculate mode Panel gt gt Outside air flows through the outlets located in the 4 instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct the airflow
195. ion in neutral and increase engine idle speed e Highway Driving Reduce speed e Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily e See Cooling System Operating information in the Maintenance section of this manual for more informa tion To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat ing turn the TOW HAUL feature on when driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on more severe grades Move the shift lever to the next lower position to eliminate excessive transmission shift ing This action will also reduce the possibility of trans mission overheating and provide better engine braking es STARTING AND OPERATING 279 SNOWPLOW CAUTION Dodge Durango Models Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can NOTE Do not use Dodge Durango Models for snow cause damage to the vehicle plow applications WARNING WARNING Snowplows winches and other aftermarket equip Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could ad ment should not be added to the front end or your versely affect performance of the airbag system in an vehicle The airbag crash sensors may be affected by accident Do not expect that the airbag will perform the change in the front end structure The airbags as described earlier in this manual could deploy unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a collision resulting in serious injury or death 280 STARTING AND OPERATING Se MOTORHOME ETC Recreational Towing 2WD Mo
196. ion without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect sys tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators The UConnect system will provide notification to inform you if your cellular phone is in roaming status has low signal strength or has a low battery when you are trying to place a phone call Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dialing via the cell phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after success
197. ional signals will flash other motorists intermittently fps f REM If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the Press the switch a second time to turn off the emergency flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition flashers key removed and the vehicle locked ADDING FUEL If using a portable fuel container it should have a flexible nozzle long enough to reach past the restriction in the fuel filler tube E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 287 WARNING A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is in a vehicle or on a truck bed You could be burned Always place gas contain ers on the ground while filling WARNING Remove the gas cap slowly to prevent fuel spray from the filler neck which may cause injury The volatility of present gasolines may cause a build up of pressure in the fuel tank that may increase while you drive This pressure can result in a spray of gasoline and or vapors when you remove the cap from a hot vehicle Removing the cap slowly allows the pressure to vent and prevents fuel spray Never allow any lit smoking materials near the vehicles while removing the cap or filling the tank Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running 288 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se CHANGING A FLAT TIRE Jack Location In the Durango the scissor jack and tire changing tools are stowed under the second row seat The jack is secured in place with a
198. ire stowage cs ss reb ss re 289 295 Flooded Engine Starting 219 Floor Console 22 xb oes CREE 153 Fluid Brake 23e OR RS 331 360 Fluid Capacities llle 357 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission luus 332 Brake 2iede x exar eei Rea a dS 331 Cooling System llle 324 Engine Oil sss RR Rn 311 Power Steering o senigi aiee eee eee 320 Transfer Case ais ac eae mb entra 335 Fog Lights ec napas Ge eine Maw een ts 124 356 Folding Rear Seat 0000 106 109 Four Wheel Drive aes eae ee dee Bee xe 226 Operation esee us xh ach cian seret is 226 Four Way Hazard Flasher 286 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle Front AXE arsaa y indeed eR Ree re iR a 336 Buel 2 2 9 be epp Me pek e asihe p PN 260 Adding eos ydus en wes ete etre 262 PICT atc neers oe nes le ae dial aaa 316 Gauge uei ape Bote ie tedio at oe dad to 164 Octane Rating 0 020000 260 359 Requirements 0 0c eee uaes 260 357 Tank Capacity sss xr e cH Ae dal cies 357 Fueling i o RR merti orai 262 Fuse s 4c se keh ec eae dee et teed de hee oy 152 341 Garage Door Opener isses spes titak iws Cne 142 Gas Cap keocgaces bru tret eee y d edis 263 307 Gas Gauge Fuel Gauge 00 164 Gasoline 244 344 4229 6 4548 Pica y deeds 260 Gasoline Reformulated 261 Gauges Coolant Temperature Fuel i2 ei deca kote ee eS d dE Pectus 400 INDE
199. is cycled off while the headlight switch is on and then the headlight switch is cycled off The headlights will remain on for 90 seconds Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch ON then OFF or by turning the ignition ON NOTE This feature can be disabled by your authorized dealer Automatic Headlights If Equipped Automatic Headlights can be activated by rotating the rotary headlight switch to the symbol A The head lights will turn on when the engine is running and the ambient light sensor indicates that the headlights should be activated The headlights will turn off if the headlight switch is rotated to the off position or 90 seconds after the ignition is turned to OFF es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Headlights Parking Lights Panel Lights When the headlight switch is rotated to the first position to the right the parking lights taillights side marker lights license plate light and instrument panel lights are all turned on The headlights will turn ON when the switch is rotated to the second position Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To rem
200. is at the front of the seat near the floor Lift the lever and move the seat to the desired position Release the bar to lock the seat into position Using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners The bucket seats are equipped with recliners The reclin ing mechanism is operated by a lever located on the right side of the passenger s seat and the left side of the driver s seat To recline lean forward slightly before lifting the lever then push back to the desired position and release the lever Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position Using body pressure lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback is locked WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment If Equipped The manual lumbar support adjustment lever is located on the
201. is left on with the engine RPM vehicle speed greater than 15 mph 24 km h for more than one mile See page 124 for more information 4 Low Fuel Warning Light This indicator lights when the fuel gauge reads 1 8 of a tank or less 5 High Beam Indicator Indicates that headlights are on high beam 6 Seat Belt Reminder Light This light comes on for several seconds after the A ignition is turned ON as a reminder to buckle up This light will remain on as long as the seat belt remains unbuckled If this light flashes it indicates a fault in the airbag system Have the system checked by an authorized dealer See page 28 for more information INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 165 7 Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This light shows when the fog lights are ON 8 Coolant Temperature Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi tion For a bulb check this light will come on momentarily when the ignition is turned On If the nmm light turns on while driving stop the vehicle shift into N Neutral and increase the engine speed for 2 to 3 minutes If the temperature reading does not return to normal seek authorized service immediately 166 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se CAUTION WARNING Driving with a hot engine cooling system could A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or damage your vehicle If the temperature light is on others could be badly burned by steam or boiling safely pull over
202. isable another transmitter linked to either memory position repeat steps 1 3 for each transmitter NOTE The capability to link Remote Keyless Entry transmitters to memory is enabled when delivered from the factory The capability to link Remote Keyless Entry transmitters to memory can be disabled or later reen abled by a qualified DaimlerChrysler representative Self Limiting Control To improve vehicle reliability the memory system in cludes a self limiting control for full travel positioning of power seat and Adjustable Pedal movement all direc tions This self limiting control may however develop an unintended movement limitation if an obstruction is encountered at sometime during usage One example of such an occurrence may include a box or package ob structing the full rearward movement of the driver s seat Once the obstruction is removed the self limiting control may be restored to maximum position The self limiting control may be restored by first reaching the recently limited or obstructed position then release and reactivate the same button or buttons Continued seat travel beyond the obstructed position will indicate the recently encoun tered self limitation has been cleared Driver Easy Exit and Easy Entry Control This additional feature provides automatic driver s seat positioning which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the vehicle The seat cushion will move rear ward approximately 2 5 inches 60
203. itch a second time until the traction control Indicator turns OFF NOTE e The traction control Indicator comes on each time the ignition switch is turned ON This will occur even if you used the switch to turn the system OFF e The Traction Control system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when in operation TILT STEERING COLUMN To tilt the column push down on the lever below the turn 8ttacict signal control and move the wheel up or down as desired 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE BEEEEEEEEEREARMAMMAMAMMEEIMMMMEEC NN DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED WARNING Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is moving is dangerous Without a stable steering col umn you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Adjust the column only while the ve hicle is stopped Be sure it is locked before driving The power adjustable accelerator and brake pedals allow the driver to establish a comfortable position relative to the steering wheel and pedals ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Adjustment 1 Position the driver seat so that you are at least 10 inches 254 mm away from the airbag located in the center of the steering wheel 2 Fasten and adjust the seatbelts 3 Move the adjustable pedal switch located to the left of the steering column near the parking brake release up to move the pedals toward the driver or down to move the pedals away from the drive
204. ith Propylene Glycol based coolants Use of Propy lene Glycol based coolants is not recommended ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327 WARNING Never add coolant to the radiator when the engine is Adding Coolant When adding coolant or refilling the system a minimum solution of 50 recommended HOAT ethylene glycol engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water should be used Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water engine coolant solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant changes overheated Do not loosen or remove pressure cap to cool overheated engine The coolant is under pres sure and severe scalding could result Coolant Pressure Cap The coolant pressure cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to insure that coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant coolant bottle The pressure cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign materia
205. ither the Panel or Bi Level mode positions when the outside air contains smoke odors high humidity Ex or if rapid cooling of the interior is gt o desired This feature allows for recir x culation of interior air only Air flows through the panel outlets or panel and floor outlets in these modes Panel gt e Outside air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct the airflow Bi Level ce Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel and those located on the floor NOTE There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer 200 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Heat Floor Outside air flows primarily through the floor out lets located under the instrument panel A small amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets Mix Qt e Outside air flows in equal proportions through the floor and defroster outlet Defrost Sq Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield through the defroster outlet located at the base of the windshield and side window demist outlets NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the A C button has not been pressed This dehumidifies the air to help
206. ition switch is in the ON position See page 260 for more information 2 Temperature Gage E The temperature gage indicates engine coolant a temperature Any reading within the normal range indicates that the cooling system is operat ing satisfactorily The gage needle in V6 and V8 engines will likely indicate a high temperature when driving in hot weather up mountain grades in heavy traffic or when towing a trailer If the needle rises to the H mark stop the vehicle shift into N Neutral increase engine speed for 2 3 minutes If the temperature reading does not return to normal seek authorized service immedi ately CAUTION Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running as you would not be able to react to the temperature indicator if the engine overheats The gage pointer will remain near its last reading when the engine is turned off It will return to a true reading when the engine is restarted 3 Turn Signal Indicators When a turn signal is activated a right pointing or left pointing arrow lights up and flashes to indicate the direction of the turn These indicators also indicate proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights If either indicator flashes at a faster rate than normal check for a defective bulb If either indicator fails to light up when the lever is moved check for a defective fuse or turn signal LED A single chime is activated when the left right turn signal
207. itioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a restraint child to put the shoulder belt under an arm e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards The manufacturer recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will e Improper installation can lead to failure of an use it before you buy it infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or The restraint must be appropriate for your child s killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex weight and height Check the label on the restraint for actly when install
208. ke advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle All three second row seating positions have lower an chorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments Child seats with fixed lower attach ments must be installed in the outboard positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to the next section for typical installa tion instructions Second Row Left Side ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 j ttesandd Li Second Row Right Side Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system The rear seat lower anchorages are rou
209. ke your vehicle to a competent mechanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311 Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight 1 Position the vehicle on a level surface 2 Turn Off the engine and allow approximately 5 min utes for the oil to settle to the bottom of the crankcase 3 Remove the engine oil level indicator dipstick 4 Wipe the engine oil level indicator dipstick clean 5 Install the engine oil level indicator dipstick and make sure it is seated in the tube 6 Remove the engine oil level indicator dipstick keep ing the handle above the tip and read the oil level on the engine oil level indicator dipstick 7 Add oil only if the level is below the
210. l on the sealing surfaces 328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the coolant pressure cap are a safety precaution Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pres sure cap when the system is hot or under pressure Coolant Level The coolant bottle system provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warmed to normal operating temperature remove the cap from the bottle remove the dipstick and wipe the excess coolant from it Reinsert the dipstick and remove Observe the dipstick checking the holes along the stem for coolant Check the coolant level whenever the hood is raised The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the pressure cap except checking coolant freeze point or replacement with new antifreeze coolant Your service attendant should be advised of this When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember A Do not overfill the coolant bottle B Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant bottle If antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant bottle also must be protected against freezing C If frequent coolant additions are required or if the level in the coolant bottle does not drop when the eng
211. l unit or the rear control unit 208 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME Rear Rotary Blower Control The second row seat occupants have control of the rear blower speed only when the front control unit is in the REAR CONTROL position The rear blower switch has an Off position and a range of blower speeds Rotating the rear blower control clock wise will increase the blower speed Rear Rotary Temperature Control The second row seat occupants have control of the rear temperature control only when the front control unit is in the REAR CONTROL position To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle rotate the temperature control knob to the right or left The blue area indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE For best operation make sure that ventilation grilles located in the rear storage area are not obstructed by stowed articles E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 209 Front Unit to Rear Unit Chart If the Front Control is Rear Airflow will come selected from Panel Headliner Bi Level Headliner e Between Bi Level Floor Bi Level Floor Floor Mix Floor Defrost Floor Operating Tips Fast Cooldown For a fast cooldown set the blower fan to the highest setting set the mode control to the panel fresh position press the snowflake button to turn on the air condition ing and drive with the windows open for the first
212. lade type mini fuses relays and circuit breakers for high current circuits It is located in the left kick panel It is accessible through a snap in cover MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343 Cavity Fuse Color Description Instrument Clus F1 15 Amp Blue ter Battery Feed Occupant Classi fication Module F2 10 Amp Red OCM Battery Feed Ignition Run Start for Control ler NGC Inte grated Power F3 10 Amp Red Module IPM AC Relay and Fuel Pump Re lay Door Node and Non Memory 10 Amp Red Power Mirror Switch Battery Feed 815a091a F4 Fuse Block 344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M F13 10 Amp Red Ignition Run HVAC Module Heated Rear Glass EBL Re lay F14 10 Amp Red ABS Module Ig nition Run F15 15 Amp Blue Battery Feed Blue Tooth Compass Trip Computer CMTC Sentry Key Diagnostics Reconfigurable Airbags 2 Fuses F5 2 10 Amp Red in Yellow Holder Ignition Run ro 10 Amp Red Start Unlock Radio Battery F7 25 Amp Natural Feed Ignition Run Start fro F8 10 Amp Red Cluster Transfer Case Seat Sw Back lighting SDAR DVD Bat F9 10 Amp Red tery Feed F10 10 Amp Red Spare F11 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors Cluster Battery F12 20 Amp Yellow Feed F16 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlets F17 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter gnition F18 10 Amp Red Spare Fuse ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHIC
213. lant during summer to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration is recommended When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic in hot weather especially when towing a trailer addi tional engine cooling may be required If this situation is encountered operate the transmission in a lower gear When stopped in heavy traffic it may be necessary to shift into NEUTRAL and press the accelerator slightly for fast idle operation Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstruc tions Operating Tips Chart WEATHER INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 211 CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS VERY HOT sls OF gt WARM WEATHER UE reme COOL OR COLD HUMID CONDITIONS bo d 94600 nt ob COLD DRY CONDITIONS m WINDOW FOGGING Start the vehicle open the windows and turn the blower control to the high position Set Mode control at 2 Jor 2 Set temperature control to full cold and press the button on After the hot air has been expelled close the windows and set the mode control to the kS setting at either 2 Jor 2 or press the button if equipped Once comfortable choose a mode position and adjust temperature control and blower speed as necessary for comfort
214. le a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described in section Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the Phone button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call Redial e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed on your cellular phone Note this may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect sys tem Call Continuation Call continuation is progression of a phone call on UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to off Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After ignition key is switched off a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone After ignition key is switched to off a call can continue on the UConnect system for certain duration after which t
215. le in the delay range the wiper will operate for several seconds 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M after the washer knob is released It will then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the washer knob is pushed for a period greater than 1 second while in the OFF position the wiper will wipe approximately three wipes after the wash knob is released To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH IF EQUIPPED Traction control monitors the amount of wheel spin in each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected the pressure to the brake system of the slipping wheel s is modulated to provide enhanced acceleration The system operates at speeds typically encountered in city traffic driving 4WD drive models also include unique logic in 4HI or 4LO to enhance off road capabilities 812287ad The traction control Indicator located in the instrument cluster will light up when the Traction Control is in use To turn the system OFF press the Traction Control switch located below the climate controls in the center stack until the traction control Indicator in the instru ment cluster lights up es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 To turn the system back ON press the sw
216. le is equipped with two electrical power distribution centers located next to each other in the left side of the engine compartment The power distribution centers house new plug in Maxi fuses which replace all the in line fusible links previously used The power distribution centers also contain Mini fuses and plug in ISO relays A label inside the latching cover of the Power Distribution Cen ters identifies each component for ease of replacement if necessary These fuses and relays can be obtained from your dealer FUSE BLOCK CAUTION When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it suggests a problem in the circuit that must be corrected NOTE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for longer than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may do this by disconnecting the battery or by disconnecting the two ignition off draw LO D fuses located in the Auxiliary Power Distribution Center PDC located in the engine compartment The L O D cavities include a snap in retainer that allows the 342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M fuse to be disconnected without removing it from the fuse block Pressing the I O D fuse back into the cavity reconnects it Interior Fuses The fuse block contains b
217. less the cus tomer has reconfigured the fuse block to switched battery feed 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Electrical Outlet Use With Engine OFF Battery Fed Configuration CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will discharge the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery Reconfiguring Power Outlets To reconfigure the outlets be sure the ignition is OFF before removing the fuse The reconfigurable fuse loca tion is a special design that allows the fuse to be installed in two different ways If the fuse is located in the Upper or Top Position the outlets will work at all times If the fuse is located in the Lower or Bottom Position the power outlets will only work when the ignition is ON NOTE The fuse block is located in the left side kick panel behind a removable cover near the park
218. ll operating temperatures These engine oils improve low 314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Refer to your engine oil filler cap for the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine oil filler cap location see the Engine Compartment illustration in this section Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils There are a number of engine oils being promoted as either synthetic or semi synthetic If you chose to use such a product use only those oils that meet the Ameri can Petroleum Institute API and SAE viscosity stan dard Follow the service schedule that describes your driving type Materials Added to Engine Oils The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi tion of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad ditives Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The
219. lly be re established by switching the phone off on Your cell phone is recom mended to remain in Bluetooth on mode Reset In rare instances it may be necessary to reset the UCon nect system The reset feature is exercised by pressing and holding the UConnect and Voice Recognition buttons simultaneously for 15 seconds Normally you do not need to exercise this feature Power Up After switching ignition key from off to either On or ACC position or after a reset you must wait at least five 5 seconds prior to using the system 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Command Tree Main Menu Towing English Redial Assistance Emergency Espanol Phonebook Francais Last See Number The 32 name language Phonebook See Setup on Phone specific phonebook will be Flowchart Flowchart is redialed used The phones paired are available across all languages Number Number associated is Dialed with entry is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 815a53fc UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Voice Tree Phonebook Entries Listed one at a time New Entry Enter Name Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Enter Location Phonebook Enter Number
220. lly travel longer distances than FM signals especially at night These longer distance AM signals can cause AM stations to interfere with one another Noise from storms and power lines can also interfere with AM reception Reducing the treble can reduce some of the noise FM Reception FM Stereo signals produce better sound quality than AM signals However FM signals will only travel approxi mately 10 to 40 miles 16 to 64 km Tall structures or hills can cause interference with FM signals causing the sound to cut out ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK The clock and radio each use the display panel built into the radio A digital readout shows the frequency and or time in hours and minutes depending on your radio model whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position When the ignition switch is in the OFF position or when the radio frequency is being displayed time keep ing is accurately maintained On the RAQ radio the time button alternates the location of the time and frequency on the display On the REF only one of the two time or frequency is displayed at a time Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 173 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune SALES CODE REF AM FM CD SINGLE DISC Audio control to set the minutes RADIO WITH OPTIO
221. lubrication of these joints is not required However the joint boot should be inspected for external leakage or damage periodically If external leakage or damage is evident the joint boot and grease should be replaced immediately Continued op eration could result in failure of the joint due to water and dirt contamination of the grease This would require complete replacement of the joint assembly Refer to the Service Manual for the detailed replacement procedure Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks doors liftgate and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the appli cation of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular 322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the fall and spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield should be cleaned periodically
222. m mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 volts Check the Battery Test Indicator if equipped If a light or bright colored dot is visible in the indicator if equipped DO NOT jumpestart the battery If the indicator if equipped is dark or shows a green dot proceed as follows 1 Wear eye protection and remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets which might make an unintended electrical contact 2 Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but with out letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake place the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the ignition OFF on both vehicles 3 Turn OFF heater radio and all unnecessary electrical loads ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 297 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharge battery The resulting el
223. m is obtained press the SEEK button within five seconds The channel will change to the next channel that matches the program type selected Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception on vehicles available with a luggage rack do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased perfor mance Larger luggage items should be placed as far forward as possible Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 195 The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next mm
224. ming a garage door opener or gate operator it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until the frequency signal has successfully been accepted by HomeLink The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly Proceed with Programming step four to complete Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device ie garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc For convenience the hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Erasing HomeLink Buttons To erase programming from the three buttons individual buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed note below follow the step noted e Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Release both buttons Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds HomeLink is now in the train or learning mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Programming step 2 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button
225. ming mode will be cancelled 4 Programming mode will be cancelled after the feature has toggled with the seat belt still buckled or if the ignition switch is turned to the lock position or 10 seconds after the feature has toggled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be reacti vated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts throughout their pregnancies Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended your dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags Using a seat belt extender when not needed can AIRBAG increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use the sea
226. mpartment 5 7L HEMI V 8 306 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII 307 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 307 E Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs iua eese o PISS ok piac na 308 M Replacement Parts ss a Rr EXER 309 W Dealer Service 1 2 0c eee eee 310 Bl Maintenance Procedures 005 310 Engine Oll oss eid aren gdh neat cds 311 Engine Oil Filter 0 llle 314 Drive Belts Check Condition And TENSIONE nace eee ae aS Seed Spark Plugs Ignition Cables ece e zh 316 Engine Air Cleaner Filter sodni 316 Engine Fuel Filter llle 316 302 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE x Catalytic Converter 0 0 0 0 0 00 317 Automatic Transmission 332 Maintenance Free Battery 6 4 318 Transiter Case ii supe osa dotate ea 335 Air Conditioner Maintenance 319 AXIS cag ictum s teak Rev 335 Power Steering Fluid Check 320 Selection Of Lubricating Grease 336 Front Suspension Ball Joints 321 Appearance Care And Protection From Drive Shaft Constant Velocity Joints 321 GOHOSIUD a a Rate deci iud Body D bicali l nue lt x eseasheeiohnee 321 lll Power Distribution Center Fuse Relay 341 Windsh
227. n the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level Refer also to the Note under torque converter clutch later in this section If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot the transmission will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature If the transmission temperature becomes hot enough the TRANS TEMP light may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmission cools down After cooldown the transmission will resume normal opera tion The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to Drive if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph 56 km h When To Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL button This will improve ee STARTING AND OPERATING 225 performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in TOW HAUL mode 5th gear if equipped is disabled and 2 3 and 3 4 shift patterns are modified Shifts into Overdrive 4th gear are allowed during steady cruise for improved fuel economy and automatic closed throttle downshifts to 3rd gear for improved braking will occur during steady braking The TOW HAUL light will illuminate in the instru ment cluster to indicate when the switch has
228. n to the ON position Do not start the engine 5 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob 6 After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds also press the PANIC button within 6 seconds 7 When a single chime is heard release both buttons The chime is an indication that you have successfully entered program mode All fobs that are to be programmed must be done so within 60 seconds of when the chime was heard 8 Using the fob to be programmed press and release both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons simultaneously 9 A single chime will be heard 10 Within four seconds of hearing the chime press and release the UNLOCK button on the fob 11 A single chime will be heard 12 Repeat steps 8 through 10 to program up to six additional fobs 13 Turn the ignition to the OFF position 14 Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 60 seconds from when the original chime was heard After 60 seconds all programmed fobs function normally NOTE If you do not have a programmed transmitter contact your dealer for details 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 1 If the key fob is equipped with a screw remove the screw With the transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during removal 81182c72 2 Remove and replace the batte
229. n with the corresponding number where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays LOAD DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading LOAD LOAD EJECT Eject Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the LOAD EJECT button to eject all discs in the radio LOAD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will remain in CD mode and display NO DISC LOADED 190 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se INFO Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Press and INFO button while playing MP3 disc The radio scrolls through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if avail able Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button while in the message display priority mode or elapsed time
230. nd bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each second row seating position located on the back of the seat Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attach ment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then attach the tether strap to the anchor age located on the back of the seat being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the c
231. nd unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufac turer s instructions for cleaning It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Classification System serviced as well ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Maintaining Your Airbag System Enhanced Accident Response System
232. nents and systems are functioning properly as a part of the test procedure The test center accomplishes this by checking the On Board Diagnostic System OBD system with an electronic scan tool If your vehicle has recently been serviced the OBD system may have been reset to a not ready condition because the OBD system has not had sufficient time since the servicing to reconfirm that emissions components are operating properly In most cases a reasonable mix and amount of normal city and highway driving and at least one overnight off period will be required to prepare your vehicle for this check however your dealer has the equipment and procedures required to make certain that the OBD system of your vehicle is ready for the required testing ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 363 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES There are two maintenance schedules that show the required service for your vehicle First is Schedule B It is for vehicles that are operated under the conditions that are listed below and at the beginning of the schedule e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and go driving e Extensive engine idling Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Trailer towing e Taxi police or delivery service commercial service e Off road or desert operation e If equipped for and ope
233. ng displays to Zero Average Fuel Economy Trip Odometer Elapsed time Global Reset If the RESET button and STEP button are pressed at the same time and held for 3 seconds you will hear a confirmation beep and the Global Reset feature will reset the distance to empty using a default fuel economy value fuel economy trip odometer and elapsed time displays 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Step Button 811a72be Use this button to choose or cycle through the four trip conditions Average Fuel Economy AVG ECO Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset This display mode becomes less sensitive to instantaneous changes in fuel consumption as the number of total vehicle miles since the last reset increases It is suggested that this mode be reset periodically for general operation or when driving conditions change significantly for example at the end of a trip or when a trailer is connected or disconnected Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank The estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level When Distance To Empty 0 the fuel gauge pointer will initially be on the red E marker At this point fuel gauge pointer on the the red E marker there is reserve ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
234. ng played and say the priority number The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UCon nect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately with in 30 feet the vehicle Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones Press the Phone button to begin es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing At the next prompt say Delete The phone names along with priority numbers will be played When prompted say the priority number of the cellu lar phone or All to delete all phones you wish to delete You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and say the priority number Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System Voice Recognition VR Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting approximately eight 8 feet away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English and Spanish accents
235. ngine Air Clenet 422 eee ED 316 Block Heater sisuna 4464045 omRERPREEES 220 Break In Recommendations 64 Compartment sisse 305 306 Coolant Antifreeze sse 326 359 COONS aeaye ei o Gee cae eer FU tae 324 Exhaust Gas Caution 00 65 266 Fails to State cce ec oer ee ovs 219 Flooded Starting 44400 ke e Xerxis 219 Fuel Requirements 000 357 Jump Starting iesus ke ehe E peses sens 296 eM E 311 357 359 Oil Filler Cap ize terrere mese 313 Oil SelecuON seed wa edie rh perdon ERE esent 357 OilSynthel Les bEed eres Pipes 314 Overheating iius u peer er ER Ende RAE ns 327 Staring ioe bi deo eee ek e ameni ee Dg 218 Temperature Gauge 0 0 eee eee 164 Entry System Illuminated 13 Equipment Identification Plate 284 Ethylene Glycol Antifreeze issus 326 Event Data Recorder 00000004 52 Exhaust Gas Caution 00 65 266 324 Exhaust System 0 0 0 0 e eee eee 65 323 Extender Seat Belt 0 0 0 0 0 0 eee eee 37 Exterior Lighting 0 0 0 iei ii 123 Filters Aif Cleaner arere esras toa dig wise ae dos 316 Engine Fuel sese 24i AERE SEE RR pitas 316 Engine Oil uk eines a dean some RR eat 314 359 Engine Oil Disposal llle 314 Flashers Hazard Warning 255983224 99 er E siias 286 en INDEX 399 Turn Signal sj xe mn alse ar 125 164 350 Flat T
236. nic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue tooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system follow the instruction described in your cellular phone user s manual 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME List Paired Cellular Phone Names Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone pairing When prompted say List Phones The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the Voice recognition button and say Select or Delete Also see next two sections for alternate way of doing this Select another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone with the UConnect system The phone must have been previously paired to the UConnect system that you want to use it with Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone The phone names along with priority numbers will be played When prompted say the priority number of the cellu lar phone you wish to select You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is bei
237. normal The Anti Lock Brake system includes an amber ABS warning light When the light is illuminated the Anti Lock Brake system is not functioning The system reverts to standard non anti lock brakes Turning the ignition Off and On again may reset the Anti Lock Brake system if the fault detected was only momentary radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be done by qualified professionals WARNING Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop 238 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING e Anti lock system ABS cannot prevent the natu ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency be yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others When you are in a severe braking condi
238. ntain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the car in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PLATE The equipment Identification Plate is located on the hood inner surface The following information about your vehicle is dis played on this plate Model Wheelbase Vehicle Identifi cation Number Truck Order Number and code numbers with descriptions of all production and special equip ment on the truck as shipped from the factory NOTE Always refer to the Equipment Identification Plate When Ordering Parts WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warning Flasher 286 WMijumpStarting 000000 296 a Adding Fuel 0403635 65445634 RR ERR 286 W Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped 298 WM Changing A Flat Tire 00 288 W Towing A Disabled Vehicle Jack Location 1 0 2 000 020 288 Four Wheel Drive Vehicles Removing The Spare Tire 289 Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Tire Changing Procedure 291 286 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se HAZARD WARNING FLASHER This is an emergency warning system and should not be The flasher switch is on the top of the steering column used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your just behind the steering wheel Press the flasher switch vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for and all front and rear direct
239. nterference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak batteries in transmitter The expected life of batteries is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios Programming Additional Transmitters Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with two key fob transmitters programmed only for that vehicle A total of eight fobs can be programmed for your vehicle Additional fobs can be programmed to your vehicle through the use of a currently programmed fob NOTE When entering program mode using that fob all other programmed fobs will be erased and you will have to reprogram them for your vehicle Use the Following procedure to program additional key fobs if the vehicle is not equipped with Sentry Key 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seatbelt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this program ming procedure 3 Place the key into the ignition 4 Turn the ignitio
240. nting 0000000 291 Wheel Nut Torque llle 294 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 274 Torque Converter Clutch 04 225 Tow Hooks Emergency 0000005 298 TOWING 2 ese se Re ghee renee mE AR EE bee 271 Disabled Vehicle 00000005 299 Guide oi GAs HOR aah REB RO ee S es 275 Recreational 4 4 zie Res 280 enn PP 275 Traction 2 292 Rn pap e s 284 Traction Control sss 0 0 0 0 eee adu 128 168 Traction Control Switch 2 05 128 Trailer TOWING aic ada el kamenne a dpn 271 Cooling System Tips 000 278 en INDEX 409 Etehes 2 Ya ees Xe ala pide un and DI 275 Minimum Requirements 05 276 Trailer and Tongue Weight 274 WHINE eee hoe mech AN vw qoe b eg 277 Trailer Towing Guide iilis 275 Trailer Weight 2 46 4 e e mem 275 Transaxle sized c REP a 3r PEE 221 Automate scies Eee Rx CR MIA 221 Operation conero einen one gh de Fa pP 221 Transfer Case 2 ee eee 335 Fluid saccus RERNa EEEE RRA 360 TRANSMISSION assasi ak Rea Rue y dea Bie acs 221 332 A toiate usui REDS Eo RES 221 332 Filter vase ven ots ene Bt Pu a Aan 334 Fld eitera ie ee She bP Ee ied oe SRI 334 360 Maintenance sue aes eae SR Soe Ba ae NUR as 332 Transmitter Battery Service llle 24 Transmitter Garage Door Opener 142 Transmitter Programming lesen 22 Tread Wear Indicators 00000 eee 254 Tri
241. o the Tire and Loading Informa tion placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety han dling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi cations or capability 256 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING CAUTION Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than Replacing original tires with tires of a different size that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict Alignment And Balance able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use e Fast tire wear may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Poor suspension alignment may result in only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle e Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided Never use a tire with a smaller load index or wear capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in
242. o the inside of the vehicle or other passengers or even be thrown from the vehicle Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Follow the instructions below See your dealer for help if nec essary Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Avoid wide open throttle acceleration in low gear The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Section 7 NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 A new engine may consume some oil during its first f
243. ock e The transfer case should be placed in the 4HI mode and kept in this position to minimize the battery drain e As an alternative to the above steps you may discon nect the negative cable from the battery M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your lll Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 387 Vehicle ssa e he ae ER eC aee 384 E Mopar Parts esee 389 Prepare For The Appointment SM E Reporting Safety Defects 05 389 l repate AcEISE se 4 geo beens 384 lb unadd Gos boc 6 plR illl Ro lRsc2 i Bid 389 Be Reagoragle WAR Reg vests s qa coi eae ln Bl Publication Order Forms 390 Bl If You Need Assistance 000 0005 385 384 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on
244. ol can be turned on by pressing the POWER button When the control is turned on it will be in the last mode prior to being turned off Pressing the POWER button again will turn off the control The control can also be turned on by pressing any button and it will display the corresponding operating mode for that button 81125697 Automatic Control The ATC system can maintain a steady comfort level in various weather conditions with a simple operation e Select your desired temperature setting by pressing the or side of the TEMP rocker switch ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 203 The ATC system uses an infrared sensor located in the overhead console to measure the temperature of the driver Based on the sensor input the system will auto matically control comfort by varying the temperature fan speed and mode This maintains a comfortable tempera ture even under changing conditions It is important that the infrared sensor is kept clean and that objects are not blocking the sensor It is also important that objects are not used that may scratch or damage it in any way Level Of Automatic Control 72 F 22 C is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person however this may vary NOTE The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic control operation It is not necessary to move the temperature setting for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the tem
245. ome Light so bok eke ee is WL212 2 Liftgate Lampies 4 8 at e Oa ay qeu Bat 567 Overhead Console Lights PLW214 2A Reading Light 0 WL212 2 Visor Vanity Lights Not Serviceable LIGHT BULBS Outside Bulb No Headlight eosls eee RR ER RR E Era H13 Front Park Turn Sidemarker 3457AK Front Auxiliary Park 194 Badk Up soe tm denk re EE PPP 3057 Center High Mounted Stoplight 921 Fog Lamp oc eee ERR eade 9006LL RearSidemarker llle 168 License Plate Eight ss steh 168 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal 3057 es VAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349 BULB REPLACEMENT Headlights Parking Turn Signal 81257538 1 Remove the two bolts attaching the headlight to the inner fender panel 2 Remove one nut that attaches the headlight to the inner fender panel Access to the nut is possible by removing the fender panel access door which is located in the wheel liner 3 Grasp the headlight and pull firmly to disengage the headlight from the fender panel 4 While firmly holding the headlight in your hands disconnect all connectors by following the procedure described in step number 5 below 5 Remove the bulb connector from the headlight making sure to pull and release the red tab on all connectors Loosen the connector by pressing down on the black Ij and or green release which is located below or above the red tab The g
246. on while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature If the RW button is pressed the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing Press the RDN button a second time to stop Random Play es INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 179 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Operating Instructions Radio Mode Equipped m BelertodheHANDSEEREPHONE QUConssUM ssedan NOTE The dgmton Switch must be inthe ON or ACC position to operate the radio of the Owner s Manual Power Switch Volume Control Rotary SALES CODE RAQ AM FM CD 6 DISC RADIO Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO HANDS the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio FREE PHONE AND VIDEO CAPABILITIES mm Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it A LOAD 6 DISC CHANGER mr SEEK MUTE SCAN MSG TIME 44 RW FF a
247. ore than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD system is ready or not ready if the MIL symbol is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station TheI M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal scheduled firj maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty 310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M DEALER SERVICE Your dealer has the qualified service personnel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job ta
248. organizer from the vehicle pull the right hand side of the organizer towards you so that the right pin slides out of the slot in the vehicle Push the organizer to the right and lift out of the vehicle INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS CONTENTS Bl Instruments And Controls 162 Mi Instrument Cluster 000000 00 163 B Instrument Cluster Description 164 li Radio Reception Information 172 AM Reception cessa s E ek baa as 172 FM R c pti ti iia rr ra e IR 172 B Electronic Digital Clock 172 Clock Setting Procedure 172 ll Sales Code REF AM FM CD Single Disc Radio With Optional Hands Free Phone Capability 173 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 174 Operation Instructions CD Mode 177 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped eese egere IEEE ke E 179 lll Sales Code RAQ AM FM CD 6 Disc Radio With Optional Satellite Radio Hands Free Phone And Video Capabilities tanitas 179 Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD Audio Play x34 99 REP 183 Load Eject Button CD Mode For CD Audio Play e red ease ER e he xa 184 Notes On Playing MP3Files 186 Operation Instructions CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play sauce
249. ose operation is classified as normal truck service NOTE The presence of water in the gear lubricant will result in corrosion and possible failure of differential components Operation of the vehicle in water as may be encountered in some off highway types of service will require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage Rear Axle Rear Axle fluid levels should be 7 8 22 mm below the fill hole for 8 1 4 axles and 1 1 4 31 mm below the fill hole for 9 1 4 axles 336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Front Axle Front Axle fluid level should be 3 4 20 mm below the bottom of the fill hole Selection of Lubricating Grease The National Lubricating Grease Institute NLGI has developed a symbol Certification Mark to aid the vehicle owner in the proper selection of grease for chassis components This symbol an example shown below is located on the grease container and identifies the appli cation and quality of the grease There are two groups n nmm identified those for wheel bearings Letter G and N L those for chassis Letter L lubrication Perfor AUTOMOTIVE mance categories within WHEEL BEARING amp CHASSIS these groups result in dual LUBRICANT letter designations for each group The letter des ignations shown in the ex ample are the highest quality level available and when combined as shown can be used for chassis lubrication Use only those greases that have the NLGI
250. oss the wheel opening Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation stow Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle raised Rotate the winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking into place against the underside of the vehicle Continue Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack 2 times It cannot be overtightened Push against the tire 6 Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack several times to be sure it is firmly in place Only use the jack in the positions indicated If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the value stem facing the ground 296 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME JUMP STARTING WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or cloth ing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the con taminated area immediately with large quantities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is fla
251. ot heard program mode was canceled before the feature could be disabled If necessary repeat the above procedure Auto Unlock Feature This feature unlocks all the doors of the vehicle when any door is opened excluding liftgate The following must be met e The Automatic Door Lock feature must be enabled e The doors of the vehicle must be locked automatically by the Automatic Door Lock feature e The vehicle is in P Park and the ignition switch is in any key position This feature will not operate if any of the conditions above are not met or following has occurred e Any manual operation of a door lock switch has occurred NOTE This customer programmable feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant Auto Unlock Feature Programming Customer Programming sequence to disable or enable 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt fastening the seat belt will cancel any chiming that may be confusing during this program ming procedure ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 3 Insert the key into the ignition 4 Within 10 seconds cycle the key from the OFF position to the ON position four times ending in the ON position do not start the engine 5 Within 30 seconds press the driver s door lock switch in the UNLOCK direction 6 A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has been changed 7 To reactivate the feature repeat the above
252. ote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory NOTE Each time the SET S button and a numbered button 1 or 2 are pressed you erase the memory settings for that button and store new settings 1 Adjust the driver s seat recliner and both side view mirrors to the desired positions NOTE Not all motors may be moved at one time Please refer to the 8 way power seat description 2 Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired positions 3 Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets up to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set 4 Adjust the Automatic Temperature Control ATC while the ATC is in Auto mode 5 Press and release the SET S button located on the driver s door 6 Within 5 seconds press and release memory button 1 or 2 on the driver s door The next step must be per formed within 10 seconds if you desire to also use a Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to recall memory po sitions 7 Press and release the LOCK button on one of the transmitters 8 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position 9 Repeat the above steps to set the next memory posi tion using the other numbered memory button or to link another Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to memory NOTE Achime sound may be heard if Setting Memory was inhibited for any reason 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Memory Position Recall NOTE e The driver s seat belt must be unbuckled to
253. other brand of regular gasoline be fore considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers world wide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance en STARTING AND OPERATING 261 and durability for your vehicle We recommend the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality We strongly support the use of reformulated gasolines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability for the engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing METHANOL Gasoline containing methanol may damage critical fuel system components 262 STARTING AND OPERATING Se MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blend
254. ould injure someone in the vehicle Always stow the jack tools and the extra tire and wheel in the places provided 5 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not fully tighten the nuts until the vehicle has been lowered NOTE Do not oil wheel studs For chrome wheels do not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts 6 Using the wheel wrench finish tightening the nuts in a crisscross pattern Correct nut tightness is 85 115 ft lbs 115 155 N m torque If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station 7 Remove wheel blocks Do not install chrome or alu minum wheel center caps on the spare wheel This may result in cap damage 8 Lower the jack to its fully closed position Stow the replaced tire jack and tools as previously described 9 Adjust the tire pressure when possible NOTE Do not oil wheel studs For chrome wheels do not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 295 WARNING To Stow The Flat Or Spare Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down Slide the Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle position it properly acr
255. ounted Stop Light 355 Certification Label llle 268 Changing A Flat Tire 288 Charging sisari dae nc demeRRRCR ERROR RED 296 Chart Tire Sizing ee REA 241 Child Restraint 42e dale se die haven Rae as 54 55 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 57 63 Child Restraint with Automatic Belts 35 Child Seat 54 4 5 44 are otis uoL Rossi E PUN 59 Circuit Breakers 0 0 0 0 cee ee eee 341 Climate Control erra eai ee eee eee 197 Climate Control Rear Zone 201 207 Clock suce teuer s Oa PI DRESS 172 Compact Disc Maintenance 196 CompactSpare Tire iia r9 senes 252 Compass ssi eG aces MERC ATE e ew RS 140 Compass Calibration sesse rasent erine nea 140 Compass Variance sacca semirgan eee 141 Computer Trip Travel lille 136 Console Floor llle 153 Gonsole Overhead 45 coss a 135 Contract Service lees 386 Converter Catalytic 0 0 0 0 0a ee 266 Coolant 0 6 pene RE E eee ea ee as 328 Coolant Pressure Cap 2 0 0 00 eee 327 Cooling System vci RP EIER 324 Adding Coolant Antifreeze issu 327 Coolant Capacity 124444244 ober AE net 357 Coolant Level 2 eps en ERE 328 Disposal of Used Coolant 325 Drain Flush and Refill 325 Inspection en INDEX 397 Points to Remember Ls 328 Radiator Cap ees 4 Ree Es 327 Selection of Coolant
256. ove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses Illuminated Entry Headlights turn on for 90 seconds when the Remote Keyless Entry UNLOCK button is pressed NOTE This feature can be activated by your authorized dealer Daytime Running Lights Canada Only The headlights on your Durango will illuminate when the engine is started This provides a constant Lights ON condition until the ignition is turned OFF The lights illuminate at reduced intensity If the parking brake is applied the Daytime Running Lights will turn off If the headlights are activated the Daytime Running Lights feature will transition to the normal headlight operating mode 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Lights on Reminder position and pressing the fog light button The fog lights If the headlights parking lights or courtesy lights are left will operate only when the parking lights are ON or On after the ignition is turned Off a continuous fast when the vehicle headlights are ON low beam An chime will sound when the driver s door is opened indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on The fog lights will turn off when the switch is pressed in when the head light switch is rotated to the OFF position or the high beam is selected Fog Lights If Equip
257. overheating If this occurs the vehicle should be stopped the engine shut off and the vehicle allowed to cool Thereafter service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifications should be ob tained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions Maintenance Free Battery All Dodge trucks are equipped with maintenance free batteries You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319 WARNING CAUTION Battery posts terminals and related accessories con It is essential when replacing the cables on the tain lead and lead compounds Always wash hands battery that the positive cable is attached to the after handling the battery positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked 4 positive and negative and identified on the battery case DARKENED INDICATOR WITH GREEN DOT Also if a fast charger is used while battery is in the BATTERY CHARGE OK e FLUID LEVEL OK vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables be DARKENEDINDIG
258. p Computer 4 4424 x eras 136 Trip Odometer i e eas R ER ERI 168 Trip Odometer Reset Button 172 Turn Signals 21 6605 essor n 125 164 350 Underhood Fuses 0 000 eee eee 345 Universal Transmitter sessa rart peanya iea 142 Unlock Auto 34 605 66045 terasan RETO S 16 Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 05 329 Vanity Mirrors ia oie ee oe ae Ro Be ee ee 77 Variance Compass sacs key ew eies 141 Vehicle Identification Number 5 Vehicle Loading 42 2 2 t RI RR 245 268 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 6 Vehicle Storage ix 49 cadena e aes 381 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 164 TEM 410 INDEX ME Warnings and Cautions nadira damki 5 Warranty Information 4 387 Washers Windshield 127 Washing Vehicle 0 0 6 0c eee 337 Weight Load Carrying 00 268 Wheel Alignment and Balance 256 Wheel and Wheel Trim 0005 338 Wheel Changing ecceri i Tirna aa eee eee 288 Wheel Mounting 0 0 0 0 291 Wheel Nut Torque 294 Wind Buffeting csse na 150 Window Fogging cee eee 209 MUndOWS x3 Ed Ub ae ERU UR d aces 27 lv CC 27 Windshield Defroster iss 66 200 205 Windshield Washers 126 127 322 Fluid sepere reses Ged bare Yer RE BES 126 322 Windshield Wiper Blades 32
259. panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e The Occupant Classification System OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle It is designed to turn off the front passenger airbag in the unlikely event that a rear facing infant seat is in the front passenger seat 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint e The Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light an amber light located in the center of the instrument panel tells the driver and front passenger when the front passenger airbag is turned off The PAD Indica tor lamp illuminates the words PASS AIR BAG OFF to show that the passenger airbag will not inflate during a collision requiring airbags When the right front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat the passenger air bag will not inflate even though the Passenger Airbag Disable PAD indicator lamp is not illuminated 81321cb8 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator The PAD indictor light should not be illuminated when teenagers most children in a forward facing child restraint or booster seats most children that can properly wear the vehicle s seat belt and
260. peakers Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak ers Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone balance and fade RDN PTY Button Radio Mode Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds If no action is taken during the 5 second time out the PTY icon will turn off Pressing the PTY button 182 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS See within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broad cast PTY information Toggle the PTY button to select the following format Top 40 Top 40 Country Country Oldies Oldies Soft Soft Nostalgia Nostalgia Jazz Jazz Classical Classical Rhythm and Blues Rhythm and Blues Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Foreign Language Foreign Language Religious Music Religious Music Religious Talk Religious Talk types Program Type 16 b d Dis No program e or un dir None News News Information Information Sports Sports Talk Talk Rock Rock Classic Rock Classic_Rock Adult Hits Adult_Hits Soft Rock Soft_Rock Weather Personality Personality Public Public College College Unassigned Weather E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 183 By pressing the SEEK button when the PT
261. ped MULTIFUNCTION CONTROL LEVER The multifunction control lever is located on the left side of the steering column 811aa59c The foglights are turned ON by placing the headlight rotary control in the parking light headlight or Auto es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Turn Signals 811acla5 Move the lever up or down to signal a right hand or left hand turn The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes to indicate the direction of the turn and proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the switch or indicator lamp is defective If a defective bulb or wiring circuit is detected for the turn signal system the arrow indicators will flash at a faster rate You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down NOTE Ifa turn signal has been left on for at least a mile duration a continuous chime will sound Passing Light You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is released 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE High Beam Low Beam Select Switch Pull the multifunction control lever fully toward the steering wheel to switch the headlights from HIGH or LOW beam 811aclac Windshield Wipers 8
262. ph 40 km h Minimun RESUME Speed 30 mph 50 km h 30 mph 50 km h 20 mph 32 km h ACCEL Increase 2 mph 3km h 2 mph 3km h 1 mph 2 km h DECEL Decrease 1 mph 2 km h 1 mph 2 km h 1 mph 2 km h Dropout Speed 30 mph 50 km h 30 mph 50 km h 20 mph 32 km h To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed NOTE When driving uphill at elevations above 2 000 feet 610 meters or when the vehicle is heavily loaded especially when towing the vehicle may slow below the SET speed If the vehicle speed drops below refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine the speed control will automatically disengage If this hap pens you can push down on the accelerator pedal to maintain the desired speed Vehicles equipped with a Automatic transmission may exhibit several downshifts under the above conditions To reduce the frequency of the downshifts and to im prove vehicle performance it is advisable to lock out overdrive by pressing the TOW HAUL button located at the end of the gear shifter es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 WARNING Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Don t use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are win
263. pment es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 HomeLink is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls Inc POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof control is located between the sun visors on the overhead console Pressing the open end of the rocker switch once moves the panel to a comfort stop position short of full opening Pressing and holding the switch causes the panel to continue moving rearward up to the full open position To close the panel the close end of the switch must be pressed and held Pressing the vent button from a fully closed position raises the trailing edge of the panel for ventilation When the panel is venting pressing the close end or the rocker switch returns it to the closed position Both opening and closing operations in the vent mode occur only while the switch is held NOTE The sunroof will continue to operate for ten minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or until the driver door is opened This feature may be disabled by your authorized dealer Express Open Feature During the Express Open operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a partial open position Again momentarily pressing the switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature To close the sunroof hold the switch in the forward position Again any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open condition until the s
264. protect on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if itis too tight you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury And a belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t allow the bel
265. quire the airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are de signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC The ORC may also modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant size provided by the Occupant Classification Module The ORC will not detect roll over E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or RUN positions These include all of the items listed above except the steering wheel and column and knee bolsters If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate During a moderate to severe rear impact the ORC may deploy the seat belt pretensioners alone Also the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning 9 light and PAD indicator light in the instrument e panel for 6 to 8 seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the AIRBAG warning light will turn off The PAD indicator light will function normally Refer to Passen ger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light in this section If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the AIRBAG warning light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up WARNING Ignoring the AIRBAG warning light in your instru ment
266. r 4 The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R Reverse or when the Speed Control is SET CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged this device takes over accelerator opera tion at speeds greater than refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine The controls are mounted on the steering wheel ON OFF RESUME CRUISE CANCEL SET DECEL 8147b086 To Activate Push the ON OFF button to the ON position In the instrument cluster the word CRUISE illuminates when the system is on To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press and release the SET button Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal normal braking or pressing the CANCEL button will deactivate speed control with out erasing the memory Pushing the ON OFF button to the OFF position or turning off the ignition erases the memory es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 WARNING Leaving the Speed Control ON when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system to cause it
267. r damaged GASCAP will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odom eter reset button to turn the GASCAP message off If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started 18 Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven There fore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined e This display indicator illuminates momentarily active traction event but will remain solid 19 Traction Control If Equipped as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON The indicator will blink during an when the system is deactivated or if a system malfunc tion occurs ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 169 The Traction Control indicator will turn ON if 20 Transmission Temperature Indicator This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this light comes on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off 21 Electronic Throttle Control ETC This light informs you o
268. rake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To release the parking brake pull the parking brake release handle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 235 sai NOTE The instrument cluster brake warning light indicates only that the parking brake is applied You must be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving the vehicle When parking on a hill turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade The parking brake should be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle m Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and the gear shift lever is in PARK position When parking on a hill you should apply the Parking Brake before placing the gear shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of PARK 236 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or vehicle may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in Park Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dan gerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be injured Children should be warned not to touc
269. rating with E 85 ethanol fuel NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your coolant every 102 000 miles 163 000 km or 60 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual NOTE Most vehicles are operated under the conditions listed for Schedule P Second is Schedule A It is for vehicles that are not operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched ule B M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 364 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi tions Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 6000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the
270. recall memory positions e The vehicle must be in Park to recall memory posi tions e Not all motors may be moved at one time Please refer to the 8 way power seat description To recall the memory settings for driver one press memory button number 1 on the driver s door or the Unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver two press memory button number 2 on the driver s door or the Unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory buttons on the drivers door during a recall S 1 or 2 or pressing any one of the power seat buttons or pressing the adjustable pedals button or pressing either the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry trans mitter when not in the ignition switch When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat and the pedals stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected NOTE Achime sound may be heard if Setting Memory was inhibited for any reason To Disable A Transmitter Linked to Memory 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key 2 Press and release the memory SET S button located on the driver s door es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 3 Within 10 seconds press and release the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter To d
271. reen release is located above the red tab on the 9008 the black release is located above the 3457AK red tab and the black release is located below the 194 red tab 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 6 Twist and remove socket from lamp 7 Remove bulb from socket and replace NOTE These are Halogen bulbs Take care not to touch the bulb with your fingers Body oils from your fingers could cause excessive heat build up which reduces bulb life Rear Side Marker Tail Lights Turn Signals And Backup Lights Replacement 1 Remove the two push pins from the tail light housing ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 2 Rotate the light to the outboard side of the vehicle and remove M 811a889aj 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Unlock and remove electrical connector 4 Remove the three screws holding the bulb strip to the back of the tail lamp 811a88aa MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 5 Remove the bulb strip from the tail light lens 6 Remove bulbs from bulb strip by pulling the bulb 3 straight out gt x 811a88ae 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M License Lights 1 Remove the two screws securing the lens to the liftgate 811a88d9 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 2 Rotate the socket 1 4 turn counterclockwise Center High Mounted Stoplight 1 Remove two screws securing stoplight housing assem bly to the liftgate 3 Pull bulb from socket 356 MAINTAINING YOUR V
272. ressure Cap 327 en INDEX 405 Radio Broadcast Signals 6 172 Radio Operation 0 173 179 197 Radio Reception 0000 0 nias 172 Radio Satellite i52 ace se ER Er EE EY 191 Radio Sound Systems 0 173 179 Rear Axle cad oe ht oa bd bees taei AG 335 Rear Window Defroster isle 213 Rear Window Features llle 212 Rear Wiper Washer isses 212 Rearview Mirrors lees 74 Reception Radio llle 172 Reclining Front Seats llle 103 Recommended Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Datis sube mV SUUS E G NE 359 Recorder Event Data 0 0 00 eee 52 Recreational Towing 000050 280 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 281 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 282 Reformulated Gasoline 0005 261 Refrigerant cs doen pA reb pee nal ha 320 Release Hood lille 118 Reminder Seat Belt 0 00000 eee 36 Remote Keyless Entry 005 19 Remote Sound System Controls 194 Replacement Keys llle 10 Replacement Parts 0 000000 0c eee 309 Replacement Tires 1 1 2 00 0 0 0 Rann eA 255 Reporting Safety Defects 004 389 Restraints Child llle 54 59 Restraints Occupant 2 6 0 2 eee eee 28 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 239 Roof Type Cartier 423 eh Ci eR tri
273. ries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To assemble the transmitter case snap the two halves together NOTE If the key fob is equipped with a screw reinstall and tighten the screw until snug SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system monitors the vehicle doors liftgate and ignition for unauthorized operation When the alarm is activated the system provides both audible and visual signals The horn will sound repeatedly for 3 minutes and the headlights and security light in the instrument cluster will flash for an additional 15 minutes The engine will not run until the system is disarmed E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 To Set the Alarm The alarm will set when you use the power door locks or use the Keyless Entry transmitter to lock the doors After all the doors are locked and closed the security light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the system is arming The security light in the instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 15 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set After the alarm is set the security light will flash at a slower rate to indicate that the system is armed NOTE Ifthe security light stays on continuously during vehicle operation have the system checked by your dealer To Disarm the System Use the Keyless Entry tran
274. rompt you to say the name of the person you want call e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phone book Refer to section Add Names to Your UCon nect Phonebook to learn how to store a name in the phonebook e The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to phonebook is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The UConnect s
275. roper cold tire inflation pressure for passenger cars is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar For vehicles other than passenger cars the cold tire inflation pressures are listed on either the B pillar the Certification Label or in the Tire Inflation Pressures brochure in the glove compartment Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual 811ad0d0 Tire Placard Location The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to 250 STARTING AND OPERATING ME check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1mile 1 km af
276. ry You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will be displayed E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 177 Preset Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations Operation Instructions CD Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Inserting The Compact Disc Single CD Player Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If the volume control is ON the unit will switch to CD mode and begin to play The display will show the track number and play time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track one NOTE e You may insert or eject a disc with the radio or ignition switch OFF e If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio OFF the CD will automatically be pull
277. s X sary Replace spark plugs X Inspect PCV valve replace as necessary X Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if re X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 374 SCHEDULE B ME Miles 93 000 96 000 99 000 100 000 102 000 Kilometers 149 000 154 000 158 000 160 000 163 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter or at 3 X X X X months whichever comes first Rotate tires X Flush and replace engine coolant if not replaced at 60 months Change rear axle fluid X Change front axle fluid 4X4 X en SCHEDULE B 375 H Miles 105 000 108 000 111 000 114 000 117 000 120 000 i Kilometers 168 000 173 000 178 000 182 000 187 000 192 000 i Change engine oil and engine oil filter or at 3 X X X X X X N months whichever comes first A Rotate tires X X X i Change rear axle fluid X X E Change front axle fluid 4X4 X X S Inspect brake linings X C Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace if X X B necessary D Replace spark plugs X U Inspect and replace ignition cables if neces X E sary 5 7L only S Inspect PCV valve replace as necessary X 8 Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if X X required Drain and refill transfer case fluid 4X4 X 376 SCHEDULE B
278. s 155 Rotation TIVES gz sos ce dem ura Ss be Geeta Shee 259 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 66 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 66 Safety Defects Reporting Safety Information Tire 406 INDEX aaa Safety TAPS due eade R exer e Linh eR s aha Rd 65 Reclining zac rp pere er eR pen aan C 103 Satellite Radio 2 2 2 ce ee eee 191 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 24 167 Satellite Radio Antenna llle 194 Selectionof Coolant 0 00 00 359 Schedule Maintenance 00005 363 Selection of Oll iovis ELE Serar ur 313 Seat Belt Maintenance llle 340 Sentry Key coss esos a deemed Eb 9 Seat Belt Reminder 000 0005 36 Sentry Key Programming 11 Seat Belts eraren dre badge te Ue EE nis 28 29 Service and Maintenance 310 362 363 And Pregnant Women 0 00000005 37 Service Assistance seenen 384 385 Child Restraint os cesta mery iera ierre 54 55 Service Contract 0 0 ee eee 386 Extender cacdc 2 gua a4 bt tan eho ee E369 37 Service Manuals 0 0 0 cece eee 390 Front oeat 22 gto cca a egret kaa a apace 29 setting he Clock 2c onse ae ae ees 172 Inspection xe vu acere ders ts mag ode oe 66 X Shifting Pretensioners llle 35 Automatic Transmission 221 Reminder llle 165 Transfer Case llle 226 Seals Maia dp Vases d Pues qe Poe pd 102 Transfer Case
279. s applied the light will flash when the gear position is out of park for automatic transmissions If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary Operating the vehicle in this condition is danger ous 24 Low Washer Fluid Indicator This light comes on when the washer fluid level falls below approximately 1 4 full The light will remain on until fluid is added and ignition switch is cycled 25 HeadLights On Indicator Indicate when your headlights are on 26 Malfunction Indicator Light This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system it which monitors the emissions and engine control system If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on as a bulb check until the engine is started If the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on for 15 seconds then blink for 10 seconds and remain on until the vehicle is started If the bulb does not come on during starting have the condi tion investigated promptly If this light comes on and remains on while driving it suggests a potential engine control problem and the need for system service Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 171 CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the eng
280. s below House Symbol in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button that you want to train and the hand held trans mitter buttons Do not release the buttons until step 4 has been completed NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Pro gramming section 4 The HomeLink indicator light dots below House Symbol will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink successfully receives the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from the slow to the rapid flash 5 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released NOTE To program the remaining two HomeLink but tons begin with Programming step two Do not repeat step one 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with Program ming steps 6 8 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device most commonly a garage door opener 6 At the garage door opener receiver motor head unit in the garage locate the learn or smart button This can usually be found where the hanging
281. s es ae che EXE 189 Load BEject Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 189 H Satellite Radio If Equipped 191 System Activation 5 ue eire yea yu 191 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID isses sees 191 Selecting Satellite Mode In REF Radios 192 Selecting Satellite Mode In RAQ Radios 192 160 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se selecting a Channel 4 ues dero 193 Storing And Selecting Pre Set Channels 193 Using The PTY Program Type Button If Equipped z2 ed am mae 193 PTY Button Scan iis Rn 193 PTY Button Seek oser akeeeia ue Rex is 194 Satellite Antenna 000 eee 194 Reception Quality 040 194 ll Remote Sound System Controls If Equipped 194 Radio Operation 000000 195 CD Play t x4 9 e e eRaes 195 ll Compact Disc Maintenance 196 lll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 197 ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 161 Mi Climate Controls 0000000 197 Level Of Automatic Control cese 203 Manual Control llle 197 Manual Control ATC 0005 204 Air Conditioning Operation 198 Rear Zone Climate Control If Equipped 207 Front Blower Control 000 1
282. s of vehicle control es STARTING AND OPERATING 253 Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on vehicle at the first opportunity 254 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 60 mph 100 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pres
283. sabled for all keys NOTE The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection Additional Sentry Keys or Mobil Speed pass devices held against or immediately adjacent to the ignition key when starting the engine may cause vehicle starting problems If a problem occurs remove the Sentry Key from the key ring and attempt to start the vehicle again Pagers cell phones walkman etc will have no effect on this system The Security Light will illuminate for about 3 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON position If the vehicle electronics do not receive a valid signal from the ignition key the Security Light will flash continuously to signal that the vehicle has been immobi lized If the Security Light remains on during vehicle operation it indicates a fault in the system electronics If this option was ordered all of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit PIN number This number is required for dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys
284. seat s to an upright position Reposition strap onto the hook and loop material on the seat back and snap strap s es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 WARNING Do not sit in the third row seat unless the cushion and back are properly engaged Proper engagement can be verified by pushing pulling on the upright seatback The seatback s will not move unless prop erly engaged Do not sit in the 3rd row seat s with the second row seatback s folded or tumbled In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M DRIVER MEMORY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Once programmed the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the driver s door panel can be used to recall the driver s seat position driver s outside mirror position adjustable brake and accelerator pedals position Automatic Tem perature Control ATC temperature and radio station preset settings Your Remote Keyless Entry transmitters can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed Your vehicle was delivered with two Remote Keyless Entry transmitters One or both transmitters can be linked to either memory position The memory system can accommodate up to two transmitters each transmit ter linked to either of the two memory positions EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Setting Memory Positions and Linking Rem
285. sed in the Operation section 8105b20d UConnect Switches The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone If your cellular phone supports a different profile eg Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UConnect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehicle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can either be adjusted from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the voice on beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each of the feature explanation in this se
286. see cerit ai eye aor dace 155 Lumbar Support 3 6 2 o e ERR pets 103 Maintenance Free Battery 4 318 Maintenance Procedures less 310 Maintenance Schedule LL 363 en INDEX 403 Schedule A ee es 377 Schedule B 25 odio der ES Bat ase ud 366 Malfunction Indicator Light 170 308 Manual Service ciue ae ERR ara RS 390 Manual Transmission Lubricant Selection llle 360 Map Reading Lights llle 136 Meniory eat sea seas de ge ER RR A 114 MITO S i inde eh a aed PW XE A UP Eo ed 74 Automatic Dimming sess 74 78 Electric Powered llle 76 Heated edo RR de dp eo 77 Memoty ee 23e TRE s eidi ED RR ed e ge 114 LG PTESLO NR ERT TETTE aaa eee Janette 75 RearvieW 422492233444 9b thee wd ES 74 brun Ae ETT 77 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 6 Mopar Parts ssa peca sret rechte 309 389 Multi Function Control Lever 124 New Vehicle Break In Period Occupant Classification System 42 Occupant Restraints sosse seanse pa eee Octane Rating Gasoline Oil Engine Capacity Change Interval Dipstick 22 234 20a RR esr ees Disposal Filter Filter Disposal Identification Logo Materials Added to 0000 Recommendation Synthetic VISCOSILY s cvy dup RU edo Onboard Diagnostic System Opener Garage Door 0 00 eee 404 INDEX aa Outside Rearview Mirrors
287. signals the inflators on nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System the crash side of the vehicle A quantity of nontoxic gas OCS to properly classify the front passenger and calcu is generated to inflate the window bag The inflating late the proper airbag deployment Do not make any window bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner modifications to the front passenger seat components out of the way and covers the window The airbag assembly or to the seat cover inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly e Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or or if items are positioned in the area where the components in any way window bag inflates This especially applies to chil dren The window bag is only about 3 1 2 inches 9 cm thick when it is inflated The following requirements must be strictly adhered to e Do not modify the front seat center console or center position seat in any way e Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not designated for the specific model being repaired AI ways use the correct seat cover specified for the vehicle e The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position every one for the best interaction with the front airbag ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 WARNING Unapprov
288. smitter to unlock the doors If something has triggered the system in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering The security system will also disarm if the vehicle is started with a programmed Sentry Key If an unpro grammed Sentry Key is used to start a vehicle the engine will start and run for 2 seconds and then shut down After six unsuccessul attempts at starting the engine the system will shut down until the correct key is used To exit alarming mode press the RKE Unlock button or start the vehicle with a programmed Sentry Key The security alarm system is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter the alarm will sound when you pull the door handle to exit NOTE You may accidentally activate the security sys tem horn sounds and lights flash by entering the vehicle without using the key fob to unlock the door s The security system can be disarmed with the key fob s 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se UNLOCK button or by inserting a programmed Sentry Key into the ignition and turning the key to the ON position e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your LIFTGATE passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep Once unlocked the liftgate can be opene
289. steps 8 If a chime is not heard program mode was canceled before the feature could be changed If necessary repeat the above procedure Child Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for children riding in the rear seat the rear doors of your vehicle have the child protection door lock system 2 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision To use the system open each rear door and slide the control UP to engage the locks and DOWN to disengage the child protection locks When the system on a door is engaged that door can only be opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged NOTE After setting the child protection door lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY LOCK UNLOCK 8132a7a6 This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances a minimum of 66 feet 20 meters using a hand held radio transmitter The transmitter n
290. sure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 mph 55 km h when you are stuck And don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 35 mph 55 km h See the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 inch 2 mm When the indicators appear in 2 or more adjacent grooves the tire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point STARTING AND OPERATING 255 Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed see the paragraph on tread wear indicators Refer t
291. t 6 0 2 0 00 0004 219 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 57 Starting Procedures 218 Theft System Arming s 9 EE ERES 25 Steering Theft System Disarming llle 25 Column Controls se icem ees 124 Thermostat 3 4 reser exe aiia sra e ets 329 Column Lock isso iu aeter reple th 12 Tilt Steering Column asas 129 Power Mer 238 320 Tire and Loading Information Placard 244245257 10 408 INDEX a Tire Identification Number TIN 243 Tire Markings ieu m RR IRR 239 Tire Safety Information llle 239 MARES 2csich co 2h oh Wes PA Se ay oe aie A a ah Re RS eee 66 248 Air Pressure i222 aen eR eee 248 Alignment essc eim emm em eee 256 Chains 2423 caemma c POETS OSA PSETS 257 Changing uris s eR oa Case ee 288 Compact Spare esse oesa eoa ue e 252 General Information llle 248 High Speed casses deos epeat d XE 251 Inflation Pressures 2 eeey ce eee eee 249 Jacking naeaieesi ted E oet oer Pea eae 291 Load Capacity sendeiros mera 244 245 Radial recre pe Dto dei ede Puch 8 2 Paes 252 Replacement iaces che ee CRT Ree n 255 Rotation zac ue xD GUERRE 259 DaleLy xxieneduiiesp iar rert A e i edere ie qe s 239 248 SIZES ou dons bu PEN d Ee ek Sid pex 241 SNOW Tr s ones dr aani Ree Pu a als UA EE Ene RE Rn 258 Spare De ssi rg yk Tp ph x p tres 289 Spinni uu trae Mah REA ERREUR KE 254 Tread Wear Indicators 05 254 Wheel Mou
292. t belt extender when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed KNEE BOLSTER 811cade0 This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the steering wheel The passenger front airbag is mounted in ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity and occupant size Also the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal regulations that define Occupant Classification Refer to Occupant Classification System in this section This vehicle may also be equipped with window bags to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window If the vehicle is equipped with window bags they are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment WARNING e Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
293. t capable of installing child restraints that require the use of a tether strap There are no tether anchor provisions for the third seating row in your vehicle the hooks in the rear floor are not designed to withstand the forces that may occur during a crash WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Do not install a child restraint that requires a tether strap in the third seating row if equipped of this vehicle Child Restraint Tether Anchor There are tether strap anchorages behind each seating position in the second row For vehicles equipped with third row seating there is no Child Tether Anchorage provided for the third row of seats To install child restraint tethers follow these instructions 1 Place the child restraint in the second row of seats 2 Route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts 3 Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the tether anchor located on the seat back and remove the slack in the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to seat failure and injury to the child In a collision the seat could come loose and allow the child to crash int
294. t to retract fully 2 be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos WARNING sible and keep it snug A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your dealer and have it fixed Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt D assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor etc If the front airbags are deployed the front will withdraw any slack in the belt pretensioning retractors must be replaced 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front and second row outboard seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt away from your neck Push in on the anchorage release button to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that serves you best As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are tall
295. ted on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN plate 6 INTRODUCTION E VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll A Word About Your Keys 9 Key In Ignition Reminder 9 Sentry Key If Equipped 9 H Ignition And Steering Lock 12 Ignition Accessory Delay Feature 13 B llluminated Entry 0000 13 Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks 13 la Door Locks 2v Geek ed eaves RR 13 Manual Door Locks 0000005 13 Power Door Locks 00000000 14 Child Protection Door Lock 17 Bl Remote Keyless Entry 00040 19 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 19 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 20 Using The Panic Alarm 21 General
296. ter a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire side wall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low E STARTING AND OPERATING 251 Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving wit
297. the button to select AM or FM Modes Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones 176 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak ers Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds and the radio will return to normal display SET Button Radio Mode To SET The Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memo
298. the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing NV 244 Generation Il Transfer Case Operating Information Precautions The NV 244 Generation II is an electric shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch which is located on the instrument panel The NV 244 Generation II transfer case provides 4 mode positions Normal all wheel drive high range four wheel drive LOCK four wheel drive low range and neutral This transfer case is equipped with an inter axle differ ential that allows driving the vehicle in the normal all wheel drive position AWD at all times on any given road surface including dry hard surfaced roads The AWD mode allows the front and rear wheels to rotate at different speeds This eliminates driveline binding and component wear normally associated with driving the 230 STARTING AND OPERATING ME vehicle in the 4LOCK position on dry hard surfaced roads This feature provides the safety security and convenience of operating in all wheel drive at all times regardless of road conditions When additional traction is required the 4LOCK and 4LO positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together through the transfer case inter axle differential and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to these positions The 4LOCK and 4LO positions are intended for loose slippery ro
299. tion involving use of the Anti lock Brake system you will experience some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake system Engagement of the Anti lock Brake System may be accompanied by a pulsing sensation You may also hear a clicking noise These occurrences are normal and indi cate that the system is functioning properly POWER STEERING Your power steering system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for any reason the hydraulic pressure is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these conditions you will experience an increase in steering effort and a noticeable amount of free play in the steering wheel ROCKING THE VEHICLE If vehicle becomes stuck in snow sand or mud it can often be moved by a rocking motion Move the gear selector rhythmically between FIRST and REVERSE while applying slight pressure to the accelerator The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to main tain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine is most effective Allow the engine to idle with the transmission selector in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle STARTING AND OPERATING 239 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings
300. tire overloading and failure Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right DUI conid lose controland have an accident Alignment will not correct this condition See your dealer Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having for proper diagnosis adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control e Vehicle pull to right or left ee STARTING AND OPERATING 257 Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen gers 150 Ibs 68 kg each plus 200 lbs 91kg of cargo Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle will be found on a Supplemental Tire Pressure Inflation label located on the face of the driver s door or in the Tire Information Pressures pamphlet in the glove box TIRE CHAINS Use Class S chains on Durango or other traction aids that meet SAE Type S specifications NOTE Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain manufacturer CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle tires or chains observe the following precautions Because of limited chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Broken chains c
301. to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment IGNITION AND STEERING LOCK In the LOCK position the steering and ignition systems are locked to provide anti theft protection for your ve hicle It may be difficult to turn the key from the LOCK position when starting your vehicle if the steering wheel is locked Move the steering wheel left and right while turning the key until it turns easily The key can be inserted or withdrawn only in the LOCK position Push in on the key in the ignition lock cylinder to rotate to the LOCK position WARNING The key cannot be turned to LOCK until the selector is in the PARK position Do not attempt to pull the shift lever out of PARK after the key is in the LOCK position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 NOTE The steering wheel will lock when the key is removed and the steering wheel is turned around 115 degrees clockwise or 65 degrees counterclockwise from the center position Ignition Accessory Delay Feature When the ignition is turned to OFF LOCK position the accessory features on the vehicle will
302. to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do notstore the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have theft protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 197 RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being On in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Control 811a5530 The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather The following describes its operation 198 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se Air Conditioning Operation To turn the air conditioning On or Off perform the following steps e Position the mode control button to the desir
303. to the vehicle or occupants Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h or completely stopped USE EITHER OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES Preferred Procedure 1 With the engine RUNNING slow vehicle to 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 234 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 3 While still rolling rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position 4 After the position indicator light has stopped flashing shift the transmission back into gear Alternate Procedure 1 Bring the vehicle to complete stop 2 With the key ON and the engine either OFF or RUNNING shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position 4 After the position indicator light has stopped flashing shift the transmission back into gear NOTE The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing NOTE If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift The indicator light will flash and the current transfer case position will be maintained To retry the selection turn the control knob back to the current position wait five 5 seconds and retry the shift PARKING BRAKE The foot operated parking b
304. toll free at 1 800 424 9393 or 366 0123 in Wash ington DC area or write to NHTSA U S Dept of Transportation Washington DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 390 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals No P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive service manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations these practical manu
305. ult The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Many of these products con tain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer 266 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monox ide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle CATALYTIC CONVERTER The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emission control
306. um permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 243 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location 2 digits L9 Code representing the tire size 2 digits ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer 1 to 4 digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 03 means the 3rd week 244 STARTING AND OPERATING ME EXAMPLE 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 Tire Lo
307. ure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate WARNING Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle A loaded vehicle is shown in the following example Note that neither GVWR nor GAWR capabilities are exceeded Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten service life NOTE The weights shown in this chart are not the weights for your vehicle Also the amount of load added to both the front and rear axles can be computed after the vehicle has been weighed both in its curb weight condition and in its loaded and ready for operation condition Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 6500 LBS A ANo FRONT CURB 2153 REARCURB 145
308. vertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 LATCH child restraint anchorage system See the LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System section e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system See the LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Section The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seat back they should use a belt pos
309. vice Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about your service ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 387 contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract Na tional Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service Contract and you require service after your manufactur er s new vehicle limited warranty expires please refer to your contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased your new vehicle Your dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See your manufacturer s Warranty Information Booklet for information on warranty coverage and transfer of warranty 388 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 1Yu 2Yud 3Yd 3Yr 3Yrd 5Ydu ZY 8Yu DESCRIPTION 42 000 24 000 36 000 50 000 Unimta 100 000 70 000
310. when an E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 adult passenger is properly seated in the front passen ger seat In this case the air bag is ready to be inflated if a collision requiring an airbag occurs For almost all properly installed rear facing child re straints the PAD indicator light will be illuminated indicating that the front passenger airbag is turned off and will not inflate If the PAD indicator light is not illuminated DO NOT assume the air bag is turned off and move the child restraint to the second row of seats A deploying passenger air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child in a rear facing infant seat NOTE Even though this vehicle is equipped with an occupant classification system children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint see section on child re straints Passenger Air Front Passenger bag Disable Seat Occupant PAD Indicator Airbag Status Light Adult OFF ON Grocery Bags Heavy Briefcases and Other Rela ON OFF tively Light Ob jects Empty or Very Small Objects On DER Since the system senses weight some small objects will turn the PAD Indicator Light on The OCS classifies an occupant using weight sensors mounted in the base of the front passenger seat Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the system Objects hanging on the seat or other passengers pushing down on the s
311. winged stud and a fixed stud It is very important to secure the jack tightly in place by engaging the slot in the base to the fixed stud under the middle seat The winged stud inserts through the eyelet in the end of the jack s worm screw ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 289 WARNING The jack is designed as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes unless suitable supports are placed under the vehicle as a safety measure The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Removing The Spare Tire The spare tire on the Dodge Durango is located under neath the vehicle in the rear E 290 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack the truck 3 Turn the wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire Continue to turn the wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle 1 Remove the rubber plug from the floor in the cargo area It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to avoid tangling the loose cable CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch 2 Engage the jack wrench extension to the spare tire winch through the hole in the floor E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 291 Tire Changing Procedure WARNING Getting under a
312. witch is pushed forward again To close fully hold the switch in the forward position until the glass movement has stopped The sunshade can be opened manually It will also open as the sunroof opens The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death WARNING In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow fingers or other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together
313. y cause respiratory harm 340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters or windshields equipped with a windshield wiper de icer Do not use scrapers or other sharp instru ments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341 POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER FUSE RELAY Your vehic
314. y to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your coolant every 102 000 miles 163 000 km or 60 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual ee SCHEDULE B 367 Miles 3 000 6 000 9 000 12 000 15 000 Kilometers 5 000 10 000 14 000 19 000 24 000 eee e a Rotate tires X X Change rear axle fluid X Change front axle fluid 4X4 X Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace if neces sary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 368 SCHEDULE B NENNEN Miles 18 000 21 000 24 000 27 000 30 000 Kilometers 29 000 34 000 38 000 43 000 48 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter or at 3 X X X X X months whichever comes first Rotate tires X X X Change rear axle fluid X Change front axle fluid 4X4 X Check transfer case fluid level 4X4 X Inspect brake linings X Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace if neces X sary Replace spark plugs X Inspect PCV valve replace as necessary X en SCHEDULE B 369 sary
315. your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an ap pointment ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 385 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized Chrysler Dodge or Jeep dealer We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to you selling dealer They know you and your vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to your dealer s service manager first Most matters can be resolved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership They want to know if you need assistance e If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Customer Center Any
316. your vehicle to get it intervals will protect the starter from overheating started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter Automatic Transmission Start the engine with the selector lever in NEUTRAL or PARK position Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly See section 6 of this manual for the proper jump starting procedures and follow them carefully es STARTING AND OPERATING 219 Normal Starting Normal Starting of either a warm or cold engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Turn the key to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the key to the OFF position wait 5 seconds then repeat the starting procedure If Engine Fails To Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting procedure it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the
317. ystem may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced if you recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement If the OBD system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over en MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL light will blink for approximately 5 sec onds and then remain on until the first engine crank or the key is turned off This means that your vehicle s OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL light will remain fully illuminated until the first engine crank or the key is turned off This means that your vehicle s OBD system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD system is not ready you should see your dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing m
318. ystem will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to phonebook is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Entries in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you
319. zed This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a 5 percentage of total trailer weight 4 GAWR ratings Trailer Towing Information Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings Trailer Towing Guide NOTE For trailer towing information maximum trailer weight ratings refer to the following website address http www dodge com towing 276 STARTING AND OPERATING Se In Canada refer to the following website address http www dodge ca Trailer Towing Requirements All Dodge Durango trucks are intended to tow trailers up to 2 000 Ibs 907 kg without added equipment or alterations to standard equipment Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg with the trailer tow package The electrical part of this package includes an instruction sheet and wiring pigtail for an aftermarket electric trailer brake controller These items are stored in the glove box If you regularly pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop and turn signals on the trailer are recommended for motoring safety When the additional trailer lighting is connected to the vehicle the flasher does not provide an indication of outside lamp bulb failure Therefore an occasional vi sual check around the vehicle is recommended Once the trailer is removed the above indication will return to the vehicle WARNING The direct connection of hydraulic brake lines

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

GE 169140 Convection Oven User Manual  Personal Companion User Guide  GE SS1000 User's Manual  notice G 593:Mise en page 1  Samsung L74W Manual de Usuario    Samsung HT-TZ318H User Manual  取扱説明書[EH-NA56] (1.49 MB/PDF)    Cobalt Networks Co11 User's Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file